WO2012014591A1 - Illumination apparatus, display apparatus, and television receiver apparatus - Google Patents

Illumination apparatus, display apparatus, and television receiver apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012014591A1
WO2012014591A1 PCT/JP2011/063707 JP2011063707W WO2012014591A1 WO 2012014591 A1 WO2012014591 A1 WO 2012014591A1 JP 2011063707 W JP2011063707 W JP 2011063707W WO 2012014591 A1 WO2012014591 A1 WO 2012014591A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light
light guide
guide member
divided
guide members
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/063707
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
張 志芳
Original Assignee
シャープ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by シャープ株式会社 filed Critical シャープ株式会社
Publication of WO2012014591A1 publication Critical patent/WO2012014591A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0075Arrangements of multiple light guides
    • G02B6/0078Side-by-side arrangements, e.g. for large area displays
    • G02B6/008Side-by-side arrangements, e.g. for large area displays of the partially overlapping type
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/005Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed on the light output side of the light guide
    • G02B6/0055Reflecting element, sheet or layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/1336Illuminating devices
    • G02F1/133602Direct backlight
    • G02F1/133603Direct backlight with LEDs

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a lighting device, a display device, and a television receiver.
  • the display elements of image display devices such as television receivers are shifting from conventional cathode ray tubes to thin display panels such as liquid crystal panels and plasma display panels, which enables thinning of image display devices.
  • a backlight device is separately required as a lighting device, and the backlight device is roughly classified into a direct type and an edge light type according to the mechanism.
  • an edge light type backlight device it is preferable to use an edge light type backlight device, and an example described in Patent Document 1 below is known.
  • Patent Document 1 a plurality of light sources arranged in parallel at the end of the backlight device and a light guide plate that guides light from the light sources and emits the light toward the liquid crystal panel side.
  • the light guide plate is configured to extend along a direction orthogonal to the parallel direction of the light sources, and a plurality of light guide plates are arranged in parallel along the parallel direction of the light sources.
  • the entire light guide plate emits light, light is partially emitted in the direction orthogonal to the parallel direction of the light sources. The state could not be controlled.
  • it is necessary to arrange a large number of light sources along the light incident surface there is a problem that the cost of the light sources tends to increase. It was a problem.
  • the present invention has been completed based on the above situation, and aims to partially control the light emission state and reduce the cost.
  • the illumination device of the present invention has a light incident surface on which light is incident and a light emitting surface that emits the incident light, and the light emitting surfaces of each other are in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side.
  • a plurality of light guide members arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, a plurality of light sources arranged side by side along the lamination direction of the light guide members, and an axis along the lamination direction of the light guide members
  • a rotating reflector that reflects light from the light source while rotating around and scans the light incident surface with the reflected light, and a scanning direction by the reflected light from the rotating reflector on the light incident surface
  • a control unit that controls the light emission state of the light source in a time-sharing manner in association with a scanning period of the reflected light with respect to each region.
  • the plurality of light guide members are stacked so that the light emission surfaces thereof are adjacent to each other in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side, whereas the light sources are plural in the stacking direction of the light guide members.
  • Each light source corresponding to each light guide member is arranged side by side and light from each light source corresponding to the stacking direction is incident on the light incident surface of each light guide member via the rotating reflector. By controlling this driving, it is possible to selectively control the amount of light emitted from each adjacent light exit surface of each light guide member.
  • the rotating reflector that reflects the light from the light source can be rotated around an axis along the stacking direction of the light guide member to scan the reflected light on the light incident surface.
  • the scanning direction intersects the above-described arrangement direction of the adjacent light emitting surfaces.
  • the control unit controls the light emission state of the light source in a time-sharing manner in association with the scanning period of the reflected light with respect to each region on the light incident surface divided in the scanning direction by the reflected light from the rotating reflector. It is possible to selectively control the incident light amount of the reflected light with respect to each region and the emitted light amount from each region on the light emitting surface corresponding to each region of the light incident surface.
  • the light emitting surface in the illumination device constituted by the set of the light emitting surfaces is a scanning of the light incident surface by the reflected light intersecting the alignment direction of the light emitting surfaces adjacent to each other and the alignment direction of the light emitting surfaces. It is possible to partially control the light emission amount for each of the divided areas while being divided in a matrix with respect to the direction. Moreover, according to the present invention, the number of light sources used can be reduced compared to a conventional arrangement in which a large number of light sources are arranged in parallel and the light emission state of each light source is adjusted individually. Costs related to the light source can be reduced.
  • the following configuration is preferable as an embodiment of the present invention.
  • (1) The number of the light guide members to be stacked and the number of the light sources arranged side by side in the stacking direction of the light guide members are the same. If it does in this way, since each light source can be individually matched and arranged with respect to each light guide member laminated, each light guide member corresponding by controlling individually the light emission state of each light source. The amount of light emitted from the light exit surface can be individually controlled.
  • the alignment direction of the light source and the rotating reflector and the alignment direction of the rotating reflector and the light guide member are substantially orthogonal to each other. If it does in this way, compared with the case where a light source, a rotation reflector, and a light guide member are located in a line, the whole illuminating device can be kept small.
  • the rotating reflector is disposed at a substantially central position of the light incident surface in the scanning direction. In this way, among the light reflected by the rotating reflector, the light path lengths of the light reaching one end of the light incident surface and the light reaching the other end in the scanning direction are substantially equal. Become. Therefore, for example, it is possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to set the scanning period of each region of the light incident surface by the reflected light from the rotating reflector.
  • the light source is disposed on an end side of the light incident surface in the scanning direction. In this case, compared to a case where the light source is arranged on the center side of the light incident surface in the scanning direction, it is possible to obtain an effect such as easy connection of wiring to the light source.
  • the plurality of regions on the light incident surface are partitioned so that the dimensions in the scanning direction are substantially the same. In this way, the scanning period of the reflected light from the rotating reflector with respect to each region of the light incident surface can be made substantially the same, so that the control by the control unit becomes easier.
  • the rotating reflector is constituted by a polygon mirror that rotates in one direction. In this way, each region on the light incident surface can be scanned by the reflected light from the polygon mirror rotating in one direction, which is particularly suitable for scanning the light incident surface at high speed.
  • the polygonal mirror has a regular polygonal shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis. In this way, the surfaces that reflect the light from the light source are all uniform in size. For example, if the rotation speed of the polygon mirror is constant, the scanning range for the light incident surface per unit time is constant. be able to.
  • the polygon mirror has a square shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis. In this way, the angle range in which light from the light source can be reflected is approximately 180 degrees. Therefore, it is suitable particularly when the light incident surface of the light guide member is large in the scanning direction, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rotating reflector in the illumination device is increased.
  • a condensing member that is interposed between the light source and the rotating reflector and condenses the light from the light source and emits the light toward the rotating reflector. In this way, the light emitted from the light source can be efficiently supplied to the rotating reflector. Thereby, the light from the light source can be incident on the light incident surface of the light guide member without waste, and the utilization efficiency can be improved, so that the luminance can be improved and the power consumption can be reduced.
  • the light condensing member condenses light from the light source so that a traveling direction of light emitted toward the rotating reflector is parallel to the light incident surface. If it does in this way, it can be made to inject into each area
  • the control unit blinks the light source periodically to change the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period.
  • the light emission state of the light source is controlled by a so-called PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) method, so that the voltage value applied to the light source can be made constant, and the circuit configuration related to the control can be changed. It can be made simple, and a light control range can be secured sufficiently large, and the light emission state of the light source can be controlled more appropriately.
  • the light guide member includes a plurality of divided light guide members divided for each of the plurality of regions on the light incident surface. If it does in this way, the light which injected into each area
  • a low refractive index layer having a refractive index relatively lower than that of the divided light guide member is interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members. If it does in this way, since it will become difficult to radiate
  • the plurality of light guide members to be stacked are arranged such that the light incident surfaces are flush with each other. If it does in this way, when laminating
  • the rotating reflector has a reflecting surface that reflects light from the light source and can be parallel to the light incident surface, whereas a plurality of the light sources arranged along the stacking direction has the reflecting surface. They are arranged in a straight line parallel to the surface. According to this configuration, the light emitted from the light sources arranged in the stacking direction is reflected by the reflecting surface of the rotating reflector and then enters the light incident surfaces of the stacked light guide members. Can be made substantially equal for each light source. Thereby, it becomes easier to control the light emission state of each light source by the control unit.
  • the light guide member has a bottom surface located on the opposite side of the light emitting surface and parallel to the light emitting surface. In this way, in comparison with the case where the light emitting surface and the bottom surface are not parallel and the light guide member is tapered, the same as when the light guide member is stacked in the correct order when the lighting device is manufactured. It is possible to obtain an effect such that it is easy to distinguish when the stacking order is wrong, and the strength is also excellent.
  • the plurality of light guide members to be stacked include a first light guide member relatively disposed on a light output side and a light output side relatively to the first light guide member. At least a second light guide member disposed on the opposite side, and the second light guide member has a support surface that supports the bottom surface of the first light guide member, and the support surface includes On the other hand, it has the said light-projection surface in the form adjacent to the depth direction seen from the said light-incidence surface side. In this way, the first light guide member can be stably supported by the support surface, and the workability when the first light guide member is stacked on the second light guide member during manufacturing is excellent. Since it is avoided that the first light guide member is laminated on the light exit surface of the second light guide member, light from the light exit surface can be emitted without passing through the first light guide member. .
  • the second light guide member is provided with a protruding light output portion that has the light output surface and protrudes further toward the light output side than the support surface. If it does in this way, since it is set as the form which a protrusion light-emitting part protrudes in the light-projection side rather than a support surface, it has the light-projection surface in a 1st light guide member, and the protrusion light-projection part in a 2nd light guide member It is possible to reduce or eliminate the step between the light exit surface. Thereby, for example, the stability when the other member (such as an optical member) is placed on the light exit surface is excellent, and the optical path length from when the light exits each light exit surface to the other member described above is improved. The difference can be mitigated or eliminated.
  • the protruding light exit portion of the second light guide member is formed such that the light exit surface thereof is flush with the light exit surface of the first light guide member. If it does in this way, a level difference can be eliminated between the light emission surface which the 1st light guide member has, and the light emission surface which the projection light emission part in the 2nd light guide member has. Thereby, for example, when the other member is placed on the light exit surface, the stability is extremely excellent, and the difference in the optical path length from when the light exits each light exit surface to the other member described above is eliminated. be able to.
  • a portion of the bottom surface of the second light guide member that overlaps with the protruding light output portion when seen in a plane rises toward the light emission side in a depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side.
  • An inclined surface having such a gradient is formed.
  • the light exit surface of the second light guide member is relatively far from the light entrance surface in the depth direction as compared to the light exit surface of the first light guide member.
  • an inclined surface is formed on the portion of the bottom surface that overlaps the protruding light output portion having the light exit surface.
  • the internal light can be efficiently launched toward the light exit surface.
  • the utilization efficiency of the light in the 2nd light guide member can be improved, and it can be made hard to produce a difference in the utilization efficiency of light between the 1st light guide member.
  • the areas of the light emitting surfaces adjacent to each other are substantially equal. This makes it easy to control the drive of each light source in adjusting the brightness per unit area in the light emitted from each light exit surface.
  • the plurality of light guide members to be stacked have the same dimension in the scanning direction. In this way, when laminating a plurality of light guide members, if the end faces in the scanning direction are aligned with each other, the light guide members can be laminated over the entire area in the scanning direction. Therefore, each light guide member can be easily positioned and the workability is excellent.
  • the light guide member has a bottom surface located on the side opposite to the light emitting surface, and is provided with a reflective member that is disposed along the bottom surface and reflects light. If it does in this way, light can be efficiently propagated in a light guide member by reflecting the light in a light guide member with a reflection member, and light can be raised toward a light-projection surface. .
  • the reflection member covers a surface of the light guide member opposite to the light incident surface. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the light which propagates the inside of a light guide member radiate
  • the light source is an LED. In this way, high brightness and low power consumption can be achieved.
  • a display device of the present invention includes the above-described illumination device and a display panel that performs display using light from the illumination device.
  • the lighting device that supplies light to the display panel can partially control the light emission state and reduce the number of light sources used, thereby improving display quality. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost and the like.
  • a liquid crystal panel can be exemplified as the display panel.
  • Such a display device can be applied as a liquid crystal display device to various uses such as a display of a television or a personal computer, and is particularly suitable for a large screen.
  • FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a television receiver according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
  • the exploded perspective view which shows schematic structure of the liquid crystal display device with which a television receiver is equipped
  • the top view which shows the arrangement structure of the chassis in the backlight apparatus with which a liquid crystal display device is equipped, the light guide member, and the light source unit. Sectional view taken along line iv-iv in FIG. V-v sectional view of FIG.
  • Block diagram for explaining LED drive control The top view for demonstrating operation
  • Sectional drawing which shows the cross-sectional structure of the light guide member in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. Sectional drawing which shows the case where a structure is changed so that an optical member may be laminated
  • the top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit.
  • Xvi-xvi sectional view of FIG. The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit.
  • FIG. 1 Xix-xix cross-sectional view of FIG.
  • the top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 5 of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit.
  • Xxi-xxi sectional view of FIG. The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 6 of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit.
  • the top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the light source unit which concerns on Embodiment 7 of this invention.
  • the top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on other embodiment (1) of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit.
  • the top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the light source unit which concerns on other embodiment (2) of this invention.
  • FIGS. 1 A first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the liquid crystal display device 10 is illustrated.
  • a part of each drawing shows an X axis, a Y axis, and a Z axis, and each axis direction is drawn to be a direction shown in each drawing.
  • the upper side shown in FIG.4 and FIG.5 be a front side, and let the lower side of the figure be a back side.
  • the television receiver TV includes a liquid crystal display device 10, front and back cabinets Ca and Cb that are accommodated so as to sandwich the liquid crystal display device 10, a power source P, a tuner T, And a stand S.
  • the liquid crystal display device (display device) 10 has a horizontally long (longitudinal) square shape as a whole and is accommodated in a vertically placed state.
  • the liquid crystal display device 10 includes a liquid crystal panel 11 that is a display panel and a backlight device (illumination device) 12 that is an external light source, which are integrated by a frame-like bezel 13 or the like. Is supposed to be retained.
  • the liquid crystal panel 11 has a horizontally long (longitudinal) rectangular shape in a plan view, and a pair of glass substrates are bonded together with a predetermined gap therebetween, and between the two glass substrates.
  • the liquid crystal is sealed.
  • One glass substrate is provided with a switching element (for example, TFT) connected to a source wiring and a gate wiring orthogonal to each other, a pixel electrode connected to the switching element, an alignment film, and the like.
  • the substrate is provided with a color filter and counter electrodes in which colored portions such as R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are arranged in a predetermined arrangement, and an alignment film.
  • the liquid crystal panel 11 is connected to a control board (not shown) with a liquid crystal driving driver for supplying a driving signal to each source wiring and each gate wiring.
  • the driving is controlled by the liquid crystal panel control unit 26 (FIG. 6).
  • the liquid crystal panel control unit 26 displays, for example, 60 or 120 display images per second on the liquid crystal panel 11.
  • a polarizing plate is disposed on the outside of both substrates.
  • the backlight device 12 covers a substantially box-shaped chassis 14 having an opening that opens toward the light emission surface side (the liquid crystal panel 11 side), and covers the opening of the chassis 14.
  • the optical member 15 group (diffusing plate (light diffusing member) 15a and a plurality of optical sheets 15b arranged between the diffusing plate 15a and the liquid crystal panel 11) is provided.
  • a light source unit U which will be described in detail later, a light guide member 19 that guides light from the light source unit U and guides it to the optical member 15 (liquid crystal panel 11), the optical member 15, and the liquid crystal.
  • a frame 16 that receives the panel 11 from the back side is provided.
  • the backlight device 12 is of a so-called edge light type (side light type) in which the light source unit U is arranged opposite to one end of the light guide member 19 on the long side. Below, each component of the backlight apparatus 12 is demonstrated in detail.
  • the chassis 14 is made of a metal plate material (sheet metal made of iron, aluminum, or the like). As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the chassis 14 has a horizontally long bottom plate 14a and a length of the bottom plate 14a. It is comprised from a pair of side plate 14b of the long side which stands
  • the long side direction of the chassis 14 (bottom plate 14a) coincides with the X-axis direction (horizontal direction), and the short side direction coincides with the Y-axis direction (vertical direction).
  • the frame 16 and the bezel 13 can be screwed to the long side plate 14b.
  • the optical member 15 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed in a plane, like the liquid crystal panel 11 and the chassis 14.
  • the optical member 15 is placed between the liquid crystal panel 11 and the light guide member 19 by being placed on the front side (light emitting side) of the frame 16.
  • the optical member 15 includes a diffusion plate 15a disposed on the back side (light guide member 19 side, opposite to the light emitting side) and an optical sheet 15b disposed on the front side (liquid crystal panel 11 side, light emitting side). Composed.
  • the diffusing plate 15a has a structure in which a large number of diffusing particles are dispersed in a substantially transparent resin-made base material having a predetermined thickness, and has a function of diffusing transmitted light.
  • the optical sheet 15b has a sheet shape that is thinner than the diffusion plate 15a, and three optical sheets are laminated.
  • Specific types of the optical sheet 15b include, for example, a diffusion sheet, a lens sheet, a reflective polarizing sheet, and the like, which can be appropriately selected and used.
  • the frame 16 is formed in a frame shape (frame shape) extending along the outer peripheral end of the chassis 14, and is external to the side plates 14 b and 14 c of the chassis 14. It can be fitted.
  • the frame 16 has two stepped receiving surfaces.
  • the optical member 15 is received from the lower receiving surface shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the liquid crystal panel 11 is received from the rear side from the upper receiving surface. It is supposed to be possible.
  • the long side portion on the light source unit U side (left side shown in FIG. 4) is more than the other long side portion as shown in FIG. Is also formed wide.
  • the long side portion on the light source unit U side has a wide shape like the above-described frame 16 (FIGS. 2 and 4).
  • the light guide member 19 is made of a synthetic resin material (for example, acrylic) having a refractive index sufficiently higher than that of air and substantially transparent (exceeding translucency).
  • the light guide member 19 according to the present embodiment is formed in a plate shape that has a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view as with the liquid crystal panel 11 and the chassis 14 as a whole.
  • the long-side direction is the X-axis direction
  • the entire short-side direction is the Y-axis direction
  • the thickness direction perpendicular to the main plate surface is the Z-axis direction.
  • a plurality of (four) light guide members 19 are arranged in a position immediately below the liquid crystal panel 11 and the optical member 15 in the chassis 14, and one end of the light guide member 19 group.
  • the light source unit U is arranged to face the portion (lower end portion shown in FIG. 3). Accordingly, the alignment direction of the light source unit U and the light guide member 19 matches the Y-axis direction, while the alignment direction of the optical member 15 (liquid crystal panel 11) and the light guide member 19 matches the Z-axis direction. Both the alignment directions are orthogonal to each other.
  • the light guide member 19 introduces light from the LED 17 included in the light source unit U, and has a function of rising and emitting the light toward the optical member 15 side (Z-axis direction) while propagating the light inside. .
  • four types of light guide members 19 having different sizes and the like are stacked and used.
  • the common structure of each light guide member 19 will be described first, A different structure of each light guide member 19 will be described.
  • the light guide member 19 has a substantially flat plate shape that extends along the bottom plate 14 a of the chassis 14 and the plate surfaces of the optical member 15 as a whole. It is assumed to be parallel to the axial direction and the Y-axis direction.
  • the main plate surface of the light guide member 19 the surface facing the front side (light emitting side) and facing the optical member 15, that is, the portion exposed to the optical member 15 side, transmits the internal light to the optical member 15 (liquid crystal The light emission surface 19a is emitted toward the panel 11).
  • the lower side left side in FIG. 4 end surface shown in FIG.
  • An end surface of the end portion on the light source unit U side is a light incident surface 19b on which light from the light source unit U is incident.
  • the light incident surface 19b as a whole is a long surface in which the long side direction coincides with the X-axis direction and the short side direction coincides with the Z-axis direction, and is a surface substantially orthogonal to the light emitting surface 19a.
  • the surface opposite to the light exit surface 19 a (back side) is a bottom surface 19 c, and the reflection sheet 20 is arranged along the bottom surface 19 c. ing.
  • the reflection sheet 20 is made of a synthetic resin having a white surface with excellent light reflectivity, covers the entire bottom surface 19 c of the light guide member 19, and is the light incident surface 19 b of the light guide member 19.
  • the end opposite to the LED 17 side is bent so as to cover the surface 19d on the opposite side.
  • the light guide member 19 has a substantially constant plate thickness dimension (dimension in the Z-axis direction) over the entire region, and therefore, the light emitting surface 19a and the bottom surface 19c described above are parallel to each other without crossing each other. Is done.
  • a scattering portion (not shown) that scatters internal light is patterned to have a predetermined in-plane distribution. The light propagating through the light guide member 19 is reflected by the reflecting portion or scattered by the scattering portion, and is thus urged to be emitted from the light emitting surface 19a to the outside.
  • the in-plane distribution of the reflection part or the scattering part has a lower distribution density toward the side closer to the light source unit U and a higher distribution density toward the side farther from the light source unit U. Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting surface 19a is controlled to have a uniform distribution in the surface.
  • the light guide member 19 having the above-described common structure is different from the backlight device 12 according to the present embodiment in four types having different sizes in a plan view as shown in FIG. Direction) is used in a stacked form. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the four types of light guide members 19 to be stacked are each divided into eight in the X-axis direction (width direction), and accordingly, the light incident surface 19a and The light exit surface 19b and the like are also divided into eight.
  • the different structures of the four types of light guide members 19 to be stacked and the divided structure of the light guide members 19 will be described in detail in order.
  • the different structures of the four types of light guide members 19 to be stacked will be described in detail.
  • the one arranged most on the front side is referred to as a “first light guide member”, and the subscript A is arranged on the reference symbol second and from the front side.
  • the subscript B is the third from the front side.
  • the third light guide member is the third light guide member, and the subscript C is the fourth from the front side (most back).
  • the subscript is not added to the code.
  • the subscripts A to D described above are also attached when distinguishing the related portions (specifically, the light emitting surface 19a, the light incident surface 19b, the bottom surface 19c, etc.) of each light guide member 19.
  • the four types of light guide members 19A to 19D have the same overall length in the long side direction (X-axis direction), that is, the long side dimensions are the same.
  • the dimension in the short side direction (Y-axis direction) that is, the short side dimension
  • the front side (light emission side) gradually decreases stepwise
  • the back side (opposite side to the light emission side) gradually decreases. It is said that it tends to increase gradually.
  • the second light guide member 19B, the third light guide member 19C, and the fourth light guide member 19D disposed on the back side of the first light guide member 19A have the short side dimensions and the main plate surfaces (the bottom surfaces 19cB to 19cB).
  • 19cD is an integer multiple of the short side dimension of the first light guide member 19A and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cA). More specifically, the second light guide member 19B is laminated immediately behind the first light guide member 19A, and the short side dimension and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cB) are the first light guide member 19A. It is about twice as large.
  • the third light guide member 19C is laminated immediately behind the second light guide member 19B, and the short side dimension and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cC) are about 1.5 times that of the second light guide member 19B. And about 3 times the size of the first light guide member 19A.
  • the fourth light guide member 19D is laminated immediately behind the third light guide member 19C, and the short side dimension and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cD) are about 1.3 times that of the third light guide member 19B. And about twice as large as the second light guide member 19B, and about four times as large as the first light guide member 19A.
  • the short side dimensions and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surfaces 19cB to 19cD) in the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D, and the first light guide members 19A to 3A stacked immediately on the front side thereof.
  • the difference between the short side dimension of the light guide member 19C and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC) is substantially the same, and the size thereof is the short side dimension of the first light guide member 19A and the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cA). ).
  • the first light guide member 19A arranged on the front side the light emitting surface where the entire area of the main plate surface facing the front side is exposed to the optical member 15 side.
  • the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D stacked on the back side of the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C are arranged on the main plate surface facing the front side.
  • the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C which are partially laminated on the front side, are used as support surfaces 19e that support the light guide surfaces 19eB. 19aD.
  • the support surface 19e forms a continuous plane together with the light emitting surface 19a adjacent in the Y-axis direction.
  • the light incident surfaces 19b are all flush with each other, and both end faces along the entire short side direction are all flush with each other. ing. That is, the light guide members 19A to 19D having different short side dimensions are arranged to be offset toward the light source unit U side. Accordingly, among the main plate surfaces facing the front side in the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D, the predetermined region on the side opposite to the light source unit U side is on the front side, and the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide is on the front side.
  • the light emitting surfaces 19aB to 19aD on which the member 19C is not stacked are provided, whereas the predetermined regions on the light source unit U side are the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD on which the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C are stacked on the front side. It is said.
  • the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD are arranged between the light emitting surfaces 19aB to 19aD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D and the light source unit U. . That is, the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D have the light emission surfaces 19aB to 19aD in such a manner that the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD are sandwiched between the light source unit U.
  • the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are in the depth direction as seen from the light incident surfaces 19bB to 19bD that are flush with each other (shown in FIG. 3).
  • the upper side and the right side in FIG. In the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D the entire short side direction (Y-axis direction) and the alignment direction of the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD and the light emission surfaces 19aB to 19aD are the same.
  • the direction from the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD toward the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD upward in FIG. 3, right in FIG.
  • the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cA to 19C of the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C stacked on the front side to be supported. It has the same area as 19cC.
  • the light output surfaces 19aB to 19aD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D have the first light guide member 19A stacked on the front side to be supported from the area of the main plate surface facing the front side.
  • the area of the third light guide member 19C is obtained by subtracting the area of the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC.
  • the second light guide member 19B about half of the main plate surface facing the front side opposite to the light source unit U is the light emitting surface 19aB, whereas the second light guide member 19B is on the light source unit U side.
  • the half of the area is a support surface 19eB that supports the first light guide member 19A.
  • the third light guide member 19C about 1/3 of the main plate surface facing the front side opposite to the light source unit U is the light emitting surface 19aC, while the second light guide member 19C has about 2 on the light source unit U side.
  • the region of / 3 is a support surface 19eC that supports the second light guide member 19B.
  • the fourth light guide member 19D has a light emitting surface 19aD in which about 1/4 of the main plate surface facing the front side opposite to the light source unit U is the light emitting surface 19aD.
  • the region of / 4 is a support surface 19eD that supports the third light guide member 19C.
  • the areas of the bottom surfaces 19cB to 19cD forming the main plate surfaces of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are the sum of the areas of the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD and the areas of the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD, respectively. It is assumed to be equal to the size.
  • the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are stacked on the front side, as shown in FIG. Are substantially entirely covered by the reflection sheets 20 arranged along the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC.
  • the light propagating through the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D which is relatively arranged on the back side (arranged on the lower stage side shown in FIGS. 4 and 5), is emitted from the light emitting surface 19aB.
  • the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D form a light guide unit in which the portion having the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD guides the light from the light source unit U toward the light emission surfaces 19aB to 19aD.
  • the portion having the light emitting surfaces 19aB to 19aD forms a light emitting portion that emits light.
  • the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C are stacked on the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D having the above-described configuration when viewed in plan.
  • the surface 19aC and the light exit surface 19aD of the fourth light guide member 19D are arranged in this order along the Y-axis direction.
  • the light emission surface 19aA of the first light guide member 19A arranged on the front side is closest to the light source unit U, and the light emission surface 19aD of the fourth light guide member 19D arranged on the back side is farthest from the light source unit U. It is supposed to be arranged.
  • the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aC of the light guide members 19A to 19C relatively disposed on the front side are relatively closer to the light source unit U, and the light output of the light guide members 19B to 19D relatively disposed on the back side.
  • the surfaces 19aB to 19aD are arranged relatively far from the light source unit U.
  • each of the light emission surfaces 19aA to 19aD has a stepped shape.
  • the level difference between 19aA to 19aD is approximately equal to the thickness of each light guide member 19.
  • the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aC of the light guide members 19A to 19C relatively arranged on the front side are relatively closer to the optical member 15 and the light emission of the light guide members 19B to 19D relatively arranged on the back side.
  • the surfaces 19aB to 19aD are disposed relatively far from the optical member 15.
  • each divided light guide member 19 ⁇ / b> S has a shape in which the light guide member 19 is divided along the short side direction (Y-axis direction) and the long side direction (X-axis direction).
  • the divided width is substantially equal.
  • Each divided light guide member 19 ⁇ / b> S has a long side dimension that coincides with an overall short side dimension of the light guide member 19, whereas a short side dimension (a dimension along a scanning direction described later) has a light guide member 19. About 1/8 of the entire long side dimension.
  • This air layer AS prevents the light propagating through the interior between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S from leaking, thereby ensuring optical independence between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S.
  • the light emitting surface 19a and the light incident surface 19b are divided into a plurality of regions for each divided light guide member 19S in the X-axis direction, and the divided regions are divided light emitting surfaces 19aS and divided light incident surfaces 19bS. It is said.
  • each divided light guide member 19S has a divided light emitting surface 19aS and a divided light incident surface 19bS individually, and each divided light emitting surface 19aS adjacent in the X-axis direction is arranged in a flush manner.
  • the entire light emitting surface 19a of the light guide member 19 is configured, and the divided light incident surfaces 19bS adjacent to each other in the X-axis direction are arranged in a flush manner, so that the entire light guide member 19 is arranged.
  • the light incident surface 19b is configured.
  • the divided light exit surfaces 19aS have substantially the same area.
  • the divided light incident surfaces 19bS have substantially the same area.
  • each divided light guide member 19S when distinguishing each divided light guide member 19S, each divided light emitting surface 19aS, and each divided light incident surface 19bS, the one at the left end shown in FIG. 3 (the one closest to the LED 17) is “first”.
  • the subscript “A” is attached to each symbol, and the right side of the symbol is designated as “second”, “third”..., And the subscript “B”, “C”,.
  • Each of the symbols is attached with a suffix “H” as “eighth” with the one at the right end of the figure (the one farthest from the LED 17).
  • the first divided light guide member 19SA to the eighth divided light guide member 19SH respectively include the first divided light incident surface 19aSA to the eighth divided light incident surface 19aSH and the first divided light output surface 19bSA to the eighth.
  • Each has a divided light exit surface 19bSH.
  • segmentation light entrance surface 19bS are named generically without distinguishing, a subscript shall not be attached
  • the light source unit U emits an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 17 as a light source, an LED substrate 18 on which the LED 17 is mounted, and the light from the LED 17 while condensing the light.
  • the LED 17 has a configuration in which an LED chip is sealed with a resin material on a substrate portion fixed to the LED substrate 18 as shown in FIG.
  • the LED chip mounted on the substrate unit has one main emission wavelength, and specifically, one that emits blue light in a single color is used.
  • the resin material that seals the LED chip is dispersed and blended with a phosphor that emits a predetermined color when excited by the blue light emitted from the LED chip, and generally emits white light as a whole. It is said.
  • the phosphor for example, a yellow phosphor that emits yellow light, a green phosphor that emits green light, and a red phosphor that emits red light are used in appropriate combination, or any one of them is used.
  • the LED 17 is a so-called top type in which a surface opposite to the mounting surface with respect to the LED substrate 18 is a light emitting surface.
  • the LED 17 has a light distribution such that the optical axis of the emitted light, that is, the traveling direction of light having the highest emission intensity coincides with the X-axis direction.
  • the LED substrate 18 has a plate shape made of synthetic resin (such as glass epoxy resin), and has a white surface with excellent light reflectivity. As shown in FIG. 3, the LED board 18 has its main plate surface parallel to the Y-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, that is, orthogonal to the main plate surfaces of the liquid crystal panel 11 and the light guide member 19 (optical member 15). It is accommodated in the chassis 14 in a posture.
  • the LED board 18 is fixed to the left side plate 14b shown in FIG. 3 among the side plates 14c on the short side of the chassis 14 by screws or the like.
  • the LED substrate 18 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 in the side plate 14c on the short side.
  • a wiring pattern (not shown) made of a metal film (copper foil or the like) is formed on the mounting surface of the LED 17 on the LED substrate 18, and terminal portions formed at the ends of the wiring pattern will be described later.
  • driving power is supplied to the LED 17.
  • the LED board 18 to the side plate 14c arranged at the end of the chassis 14, it is possible to easily secure a wiring path to the LED driving unit 24.
  • the LED substrate 18 has a dimension in the Z-axis direction that is substantially equal to the sum of the thicknesses of the four light guide members 19A to 19D stacked on each other.
  • four LEDs 17 are arranged side by side in the Z-axis direction, that is, in the stacking direction of the light guide members 19, and the number of the LEDs 17 is equal to the number of the light guide members 19 stacked.
  • the one arranged most on the front side is referred to as “first LED”, and the subscript A is arranged on the code second and from the front side.
  • the four LEDs 17A to 17D are arranged at positions corresponding individually to the stacked four light guide members 19A to 19D in the Z-axis direction. Specifically, the first LED 17A is the first light guide member 19A, the second LED 17B is the second light guide member 19B, the third LED 17C is the third light guide member 19C, and the fourth LED 17D is the fourth light guide member 19D.
  • These four LEDs 17A to 17D are arranged at substantially the center position in the Z-axis direction of the corresponding light guide members 19A to 19D, and the interval between adjacent LEDs 17, that is, the arrangement pitch of the LEDs 17A to 17D, is It almost coincides with the plate thickness dimension of the light guide members 19A to 19D.
  • the four LEDs 17A to 17D are linearly aligned along the Z-axis direction without being shifted from each other in the Y-axis direction, and the arrangement direction is parallel to the light incident surface 19b.
  • the intervals between the LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction and the condenser lens 21 described below are all equal, and further, the intervals between the LEDs 17A to 17D and the polygon mirror 22 are set. Are all equal.
  • the condenser lens 21 is interposed between the LED 17 and a polygon mirror 22 described below, and is disposed relatively closer to the LED 17 than the polygon mirror 22. Specifically, the condensing lens 21 is arranged at a position facing the first divided light incident surface 19bSA of the first divided light guide member 19SA closest to the LED 17 among the light guide members 19 with a predetermined interval. Has been.
  • the condensing lens 21 as a whole is formed in a semi-doughnut shape in plan view, and the surface on the LED 17 side (surface on the light incident side) forms a concave curved surface and the surface on the polygon mirror 22 side (light emission). Side surface) is a convex curved surface.
  • the condensing lens 21 can emit the light emitted from the LED 17 while condensing the light, and the emitted light travels substantially straight along the X-axis direction (parallel to the light incident surface 19b).
  • the optical design is such that it hits the polygon mirror 22.
  • the light emitted from the LED 17 includes light that travels in a direction inclined with respect to the optical axis, in addition to the light having the highest emission intensity that travels along the X-axis direction, which is the optical axis. There are a lot of components having a component in the Y-axis direction or the Z-axis direction.
  • the polygon mirror 22 has an X-axis direction with respect to the condenser lens 21, that is, in the traveling direction of the emitted light from the condenser lens 21, more than the distance between the condenser lens 21 and the LED 17. They are placed at relatively wide positions. That is, the polygon mirror 22 is arranged linearly along the X-axis direction with respect to the LED 17 and the condenser lens 21. The polygon mirror 22 is disposed at a substantially central position with respect to the light guide member 19 in the entire long side direction (the parallel direction of the divided light guide members 19S, the X-axis direction).
  • the polygon mirror 22 has a rotation axis 22a along the Z-axis direction, that is, the stacking direction of the light guide member 19, and has a reflection surface 22b that reflects light from the condenser lens 21 on the outer peripheral surface thereof.
  • the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 can be scanned with the reflected light by reflecting the light from the condensing lens 21 by the reflecting surface 22b while rotating around the rotation axis 22a in one direction.
  • the polygon mirror 22 has substantially the same dimension in the Z-axis direction as the sum of the thicknesses of the four light guide members 19A to 19D stacked on each other.
  • the dimensions of the LED substrate 18 in the Z-axis direction are almost the same.
  • the reflection surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22 reflects the light emitted from the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction and irradiated through the condenser lens 21, and each light guide member 19A. It is possible to individually scan the light incident surfaces 19bA to 19bD of 19 to 19D.
  • the polygon mirror 22 has a prismatic shape having a square planar shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis 22 a (Z-axis direction) as a whole.
  • Four flat reflective surfaces 22b are formed adjacent to each other on the surface.
  • the reflecting surfaces 22b are equal in area and dimensions.
  • the angle formed by the adjacent reflecting surfaces 22b is 90 degrees. Since each reflecting surface 22b is a substantially straight surface along the Z-axis direction (the direction in which the light guide members 19 are stacked and the direction in which the LEDs 17 are arranged), depending on the rotational position of the polygon mirror 22, the light incident surface 19b or the LED substrate 18 is used.
  • the LED 17 can be mounted in parallel with the mounting surface of the LEDs 17 (alignment direction of the LEDs 17A to 17D) (FIG. 3). Accordingly, the light reflected by each reflecting surface 22b travels straight along the plane direction along the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, and has almost no component in the Z-axis direction. Thereby, the light emitted from the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction and reflected by the reflecting surface 22b via the condenser lens 21 does not intersect in the Z-axis direction.
  • the light guide members 19A to 19D corresponding to the directions are individually incident.
  • the light emitted from the first LED 17A enters the light incident surface 19bA of the first light guide member 19A via the condenser lens 21 and the polygon mirror 22, and then selectively exits from the light emitting surface 19aA.
  • the lowermost 1 ⁇ 4 region shown in FIG. 3 is in charge of the entire light emitting surface of the backlight device 12.
  • the light emitted from the second LED 17B is selectively emitted from the light emission surface 19aB of the second light guide member 19B, and is the second one from the lower side shown in FIG. / 4 area.
  • the light emitted from the third LED 17C is selectively emitted from the light emission surface 19aC of the third light guide member 19C, and is the second quarter from the upper side shown in FIG. You will be in charge of the area.
  • the light emitted from the fourth LED 17D is selectively emitted from the light emitting surface 19aD of the fourth light guide member 19D, and the uppermost 1 ⁇ 4 region shown in FIG. I will be in charge
  • the polygon mirror 22 is driven by an electromagnetic motor (not shown) to rotate around the rotation axis 22a in the clockwise direction (arrow direction) shown in FIG. It is rotated at a speed (angular speed).
  • the angle of each reflecting surface 22b with respect to the light from the condenser lens 21 toward the polygon mirror 22 changes in a time-division manner, and the light reflected by the reflecting surface 22b
  • the traveling direction changes in a time-sharing manner.
  • the traveling direction of the light (reflected light) reflected by the reflecting surface 22 b is the traveling direction of the light from the condenser lens 21 toward the polygon mirror 22.
  • the angle formed with respect to the angle can be changed in the range of 0 to 180 degrees (angle range of 180 degrees). Accordingly, the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 is directed from the left side to the right side shown in FIG. 3 along the long side direction (X-axis direction) of the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 as the polygon mirror 22 rotates. It is possible to scan linearly. Specifically, the reflected light is transmitted from the left end shown in FIG. 3 on the first light incident surface 19bSA of the first divided light guide member 19SA to FIG. 3 on the eighth light incident surface 19bSH of the eighth divided light guide member 19SH. It can be continuously scanned over the entire area up to the right end shown.
  • the rotation speed of the polygon mirror 22 is such that the time it takes for the reflected light to scan from the left end of the first light incident surface 19bSA shown in FIG. 3 to the right end of the eighth light incident surface 19bSH shown in FIG.
  • the display period of one display image on the panel 11 is set to coincide with, for example, 1/60 seconds, 1/120 seconds, or the like.
  • the time for scanning the divided light incident surface 19bS of each divided light guide member 19S with reflected light is the display period of one display image on the liquid crystal panel 11 ( For example, about 1/8 of 1/60 seconds, 1/120 seconds, etc.).
  • the polygon mirror 22 and the light guide member 19 are arranged along the Y-axis direction, and the arrangement direction is orthogonal to the X-axis direction that is the arrangement direction of the LED 17, the condenser lens 21, and the polygon mirror 22. There is a relationship.
  • the synchronization detection unit 23 is attached to the side plate 14 c of the chassis 14 to which the LED board 18 is attached.
  • the synchronization detection unit 23 is located between the LED substrate 18 and the light guide member 19 and can receive the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22.
  • the synchronization detection unit 23 has a built-in optical sensor (not shown) that can detect light, and can detect reflected light from the polygon mirror 22.
  • the synchronization detection unit 23 is connected to a control unit 25 described below, and can output a detection signal toward the control unit 25 when detecting reflected light from the polygon mirror 22. Subsequently, drive control of the control unit 25 and the LED 17 will be described in detail.
  • the control unit 25 can output a signal to the LED drive unit 24 based on the detection signal from the synchronization detection unit 23 to control the drive of each LED 17. Specifically, when the detection signal is input from the synchronization detection unit 23, the control unit 25 refers to information on the rotation speed of the polygon mirror 22 and outputs a signal related to the control to the LED drive unit 24 to obtain a predetermined signal.
  • the light emission state of each LED 17 can be controlled at the timing. At this time, the control unit 25 can control the light emission state of each LED 17 in a time-sharing manner for each scanning period with respect to each divided light incident surface 19bS by reflected light.
  • the control unit 25 can individually control the light emission states of the first LED 17A to the fourth LED 17D.
  • a specific control method of the light emission state of each LED 17 by the control unit 25 will be described in detail.
  • the control unit 25 changes the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period by periodically blinking the LED 17 while keeping the voltage value applied to each LED 17 constant, so-called PWM (Pulse Width Modulation:
  • PWM Pulse Width Modulation:
  • the light emission state of each LED 17 is controlled by a (pulse width modulation) method, and the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period in one scanning period with respect to the divided light incident surface 19bS by reflected light is set to each divided light incident surface 19bS.
  • the amount of incident light on the split light incident surface 19bS during the one scanning period is uniquely determined by the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period because the voltage value applied to each LED 17 is constant.
  • the control unit 25 can freely set the amount of incident light on each divided light incident surface 19bS individually.
  • the amount of incident light on each divided light incident surface 19bS can be all the same or different. it can.
  • the control unit 25 receives a signal related to a display image from a liquid crystal panel control unit 26 that controls driving of the liquid crystal panel 11. Therefore, the control unit 25 can control the light emission state of each LED 17 based on the luminance information of the display image.
  • the light emitting surfaces of the backlight device 12 as a whole according to the present embodiment are shared by the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aD of the four stacked light guide members 19A to 19D.
  • control unit 25 divides the display image on the liquid crystal panel 11 into 32 divided display areas corresponding to the 32 areas constituting the light emitting surface, and signals related to the display image. From the calculated luminance information, the light emission states of the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged in the Z-axis direction are independently driven based on the calculated luminance information, and the LEDs 17A to 17A The light emission state of 17D is controlled by time division for each scanning period with respect to each divided light incident surface 19bS.
  • This embodiment has the structure as described above, and its operation will be described next.
  • the separately manufactured liquid crystal panel 11, backlight device 12, bezel 13 and the like are assembled.
  • the manufacturing procedure of the backlight device 12 will be mainly described.
  • the respective guides each integrating the reflection sheet 20 are performed.
  • work which accommodates the optical member 19 is performed.
  • the light guide member 19 is attached, as shown in FIG. 4, the work of attaching the fourth light guide member 19D to the bottom plate 14a of the chassis 14 is performed in advance, and then the third light guide member 19C is attached to the fourth light guide member. It is placed and stacked on the support surface 19eD of 19D.
  • each light guide member 19A to 19D is divided into eight divided light guide members 19S, each divided light guide member 19S constituting each light guide member 19A to 19D is actually arranged in the X-axis direction.
  • the above-described mounting operation is performed by sequentially stacking them in the Z-axis direction while arranging them (FIGS. 3 and 5).
  • the main plate surfaces facing the front side in the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D arranged on the back side are the respective ones in the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C laminated on the front side. Since the area of each light emitting surface 19aB to 19aD is larger than that of the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC, the work of placing the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C can be easily performed. it can. In addition, the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC of the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C and the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD of the second light guide members 19B to 19D arranged on the back side are parallel to each other.
  • the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C can be stably supported. Further, when the operator makes a mistake in the stacking order of the light guide members 19A to 19D, the light guide member 19 erroneously arranged on the front side is supported by the light guide member 19 erroneously arranged on the back side. Since the unsupported part is generated, the support state becomes unstable, and the unsupported part is easily lifted, so it is easy for the operator to make a mistake in the stacking order. You can notice.
  • the light incident surfaces 19bA to 19bD of the light guide members 19A to 19D are aligned with each other, and in the Y-axis direction of the divided light guide members 19S. The both side end faces are aligned with each other.
  • the frame 16 is attached to the chassis 14, and the optical members 15 and the liquid crystal panel 11 are sequentially mounted on the frame 16. Thereafter, the liquid crystal display device 10 is manufactured by attaching the bezel 13.
  • the liquid crystal panel control unit 26 controls the driving of the liquid crystal panel 11 and the light from the light source unit U is transmitted to each light guide member 19.
  • the light is incident on the light incident surface 19b, propagates through the inside thereof, and is emitted toward the liquid crystal panel 11 by being emitted from the light emitting surface 19a while being raised toward the optical member 15, and thus the liquid crystal panel 11 is irradiated with a predetermined amount. Is displayed.
  • the operation of the backlight device 12 will be described in detail.
  • each LED 17 When the power is turned on, each LED 17 is turned on by the LED drive unit 25 based on a signal from the control unit 25 constituting the light source unit U (FIG. 6), and the polygon motor 22 is driven by driving the electromagnetic motor. Is rotated around the rotation axis 22a at a constant rotation speed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the light from each of the LEDs 17A to 17D is condensed by the condenser lens 21, so that it does not have components in the Y-axis direction and the Z-axis direction and extends along the X-axis direction.
  • the light After being emitted toward the polygon mirror 22 as light that travels straight forward, the light strikes the reflecting surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22, and a predetermined angle is given in the plane direction along the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. Reflected by.
  • the light reflected by the reflection surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22 does not have a component in the Z-axis direction, the light emitted from the LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction is reflected by the reflection surface 22b. Even if they are reflected, they do not cross each other in the Z-axis direction, and are individually incident on the light guide members 19A to 19D corresponding to the Z-axis direction. Note that the optical path lengths until the light emitted from the LEDs 17A to 17D reaches the light incident surfaces 19bA to 19bD of the light guide members 19A to 19D are all equal.
  • the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 can scan the light incident surfaces 19bA to 19bD of the light guide members 19A to 19D over the entire length in the X-axis direction. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 scanned from the left end to the right end of the first divided light incident surface 19bSA of the first divided light guide member 19SA. Thereafter, the second divided light incident surface 19bSB of the second divided light guide member 19SB on the right side, the third divided light incident surface 19bSC... Of the third divided light guide member 19SC are scanned in this order, and the eighth divided light guide is obtained.
  • the first divided light incident surface 19bSA of the first divided light guide member 19SA is scanned again.
  • the time required for scanning all the divided light incident surfaces 19bS by reflected light by setting the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 22 is the display period of one display image on the liquid crystal panel 11 (for example, 1/60 seconds). , 1/120 seconds, etc.).
  • the light emission states of the LEDs 17A to 17D are controlled by the control unit 25 so as to be synchronized with the rotation state of the polygon mirror 22 and the display image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 11.
  • the light reflected by the reflecting surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22 includes what is irradiated on the synchronization detecting unit 23 as shown in FIG. 11 in addition to the light incident on the light incident surface 19b. Therefore, based on the detection of the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 by the synchronization detection unit 23 and the output of the detection signal to the control unit 25, the control unit 25 changes the rotation state of the polygon mirror 22.
  • the light emission states of the LEDs 17A to 17D can be synchronized.
  • the control unit 25 determines the light incident surface 19bA of each of the light guide members 19A to 19D by the reflected light of the polygon mirror 22 from the timing at which the detection signal is received from the synchronization detection unit 23 and the information about the rotation speed of the polygon mirror 22. Since the scanning position with respect to .about.19bD can be accurately calculated, the light emission state of each of the LEDs 17A to 17D can be controlled in a time-sharing manner for each scanning period in which the reflected light scans each divided light incident surface 19bS. is there. As shown in FIG. 12, this scanning period means the divided light from the scanning start position (indicated by the one-dot chain line in FIG.
  • control unit 25 it is preferable to perform control such that the LEDs 17A to 17D are turned off during a period in which the reflected light can scan the air layer AS existing between the divided light incident surfaces 19bS.
  • the control unit 25 controls the light emission states of the LEDs 17A to 17D based on a signal related to the display image from the liquid crystal panel control unit 26 that controls the driving of the liquid crystal panel 11. .
  • the control unit 25 determines the Y-axis direction shared by the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aD of the stacked four light guide members 19A to 19D from the signal related to the display image input from the liquid crystal panel 11. And the eight regions in the X-axis direction shared by the divided light exit surfaces 19aSA to 19aSH of the divided light guide members 19S constituting the light guide members 19A to 19D.
  • the luminance required for the 32 divided display areas is calculated, and based on the calculated luminance information, the light emission states of the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged in the Z-axis direction are independently driven, and each LED 17A is driven.
  • the light emission states of ⁇ 17D are controlled in a time-sharing manner for each scanning period with respect to each divided light incident surface 19bS (see FIG. 3).
  • the control unit 25 determines the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period of each LED 17A to 17D for each scanning period with respect to each divided light incident surface 19bS.
  • the LED 17 is driven and controlled in a time-sharing manner while being determined based on the luminance information of the display area. For example, in the scanning period of the divided light incident surface 19bS of the divided light guide member 19S having the divided light emitting surface 19bS in the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aD sharing the relatively dark segmented display region, the lighting period is relatively short.
  • the incident light quantity is relatively reduced by extending the light extinction period, while the divided light guide member 19S having the divided light emitting surfaces 19bS in the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aD sharing the relatively bright divided display areas.
  • the scanning period of the split light incident surface 19bS the light emission states of the LEDs 17A to 17D are time-divided for each scanning period so that the incident light quantity is relatively increased by relatively lengthening the lighting period and shortening the extinguishing period. And control it.
  • the amount of incident light on the divided light incident surface 19bS of each of the 32 divided light guiding members 19S constituting each of the light guiding members 19A to 19D can be individually adjusted, and the amount of incident light can be adjusted for the display image. It can be appropriate based on the luminance information.
  • each split light incident surface 19bS is reflected by the reflection sheet 20 or totally reflected at the interface with the air layer AS, so that each split light guide can be efficiently performed without leaking to the outside.
  • the light After propagating through the member 19S, the light is emitted from the split light exit surface 19aS. And the emitted light from each divided light emitting surface 19aS is applied to each divided display area in the liquid crystal panel 11, while the emitted light quantity is substantially equal to the incident light quantity to each divided light incident surface 19bS. Because of this relationship, the contrast ratio of the display image can be increased.
  • the first light guide member 19A since the entire area of the main plate surface facing the front side is the light emitting surface 19aA, the light propagating inside is raised by the reflection sheet 20 And is reflected by the reflecting portion or scattered by the scattering portion, so that the incident angle with respect to the light emitting surface 19aA becomes smaller than the critical angle, and most of the light is emitted from the light emitting surface 19aA to the front side outside. Is emitted.
  • the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide in which the region on the light source unit U side of the main plate surface facing the front side is laminated on the front side.
  • the light propagating through the inside reflects the reflection sheets 20 of the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C covering the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD, and the bottom surface.
  • the light reaches the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD while being repeatedly reflected between the reflection sheets 20 arranged on 19cB to 19cD.
  • the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D and the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C stacked on the front side are partitioned by the reflection sheet 20. It is avoided that light passes between each other.
  • the light that has propagated through the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D and reached the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD side is the same as that of the first light guide member 19A described above, and the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD.
  • To the outside of the front side since the surface 19d opposite to the light incident surface 19b in each light guide member 19 is covered with the reflection sheet 20, it is possible to prevent the light from leaking from the surface 19d to the outside. Thus, light is guided to the light exit surface 19a.
  • the backlight device (illumination device) 12 of the present embodiment has the light incident surface 19b on which light is incident and the light emitting surface 19a for emitting the incident light, and the light emitting surfaces of each other.
  • a plurality of light guide members 19 arranged so as to be adjacent to each other in the depth direction as viewed from the light incident surface 19b side, and a plurality arranged side by side along the direction in which the light guide members 19 are laminated.
  • a polygon mirror that reflects light from the LED 17 while being rotated (rotated) around an axis along the stacking direction of the LED (light source) 17 and the light guide member 19, and scans the light incident surface 19b with the reflected light (
  • the rotating reflector) 22 and the light incident surface 19b are divided into a plurality of regions (divided light incident surface 19bS) in the scanning direction (X-axis direction) by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22, the reflected light to each region
  • a control unit 25 for dividing and controlled during the light emission state of the LED17 in association with the scanning period.
  • the plurality of light guide members 19 are stacked such that the light emission surfaces 19a are adjacent to each other in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface 19b side, whereas the LEDs 17 are A plurality of light guide members 19 are arranged side by side in the stacking direction, and light from each LED 17 corresponding to the stacking direction is incident on the light incident surface 19 b of each light guide member 19 through the polygon mirror 22.
  • the driving of each LED 17 corresponding to 19 the amount of light emitted from each adjacent light emitting surface 19a in each light guide member 19 can be selectively controlled.
  • the polygon mirror 22 that reflects the light from the LED 17 can be rotated around an axis along the stacking direction of the light guide member 19 to scan the reflected light on the light incident surface 19b.
  • the scanning direction intersects with the arrangement direction of the adjacent light emitting surfaces 19a described above.
  • the control unit 25 controls the light emission state of the LED 17 in a time-sharing manner in association with the scanning period of the reflected light with respect to each region on the light incident surface 19b divided in the scanning direction by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22.
  • the light emitting surface in the backlight device 12 configured by the set of the light emitting surfaces 19a is in the arrangement direction of the light emitting surfaces 19a adjacent to each other (Y-axis direction) and the arrangement direction of the light emitting surfaces 19a.
  • the light emission amount can be partially controlled for each of the divided regions.
  • the number of LEDs 17 used can be reduced compared to a conventional arrangement in which a large number of LEDs are arranged in parallel and the light emission state of each LED is individually adjusted. For example, the cost related to the LED 17 can be reduced.
  • the number of the light guide members 19 to be laminated matches the number of the LEDs 17 arranged along the direction in which the light guide members 19 are laminated. If it does in this way, since each LED17 can be individually matched and arranged with respect to each light guide member 19 laminated, each light guide corresponding to each light guide state can be controlled by individually controlling the light emission state of each LED17. The amount of light emitted from the light exit surface 19a of the member 19 can be individually controlled.
  • the arrangement direction of the LEDs 17 and the polygon mirror 22 (X-axis direction) and the arrangement direction of the polygon mirror 22 and the light guide member 19 (Y-axis direction) are substantially orthogonal to each other. In this way, the entire backlight device 12 can be kept small as compared with the case where the LED, the polygon mirror, and the light guide member are arranged in a straight line.
  • the polygon mirror 22 is disposed at a substantially central position of the light incident surface 19b in the scanning direction. In this way, of the light reflected by the polygon mirror 22, the light path lengths of the light reaching one end of the light incident surface 19 b and the light reaching the other end in the scanning direction are substantially equal. Become. Therefore, for example, it is possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to set the scanning period of each region of the light incident surface 19 b by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22.
  • the LED 17 is disposed on the end side of the light incident surface 19b in the scanning direction. In this way, compared to the case where the LED is arranged on the center side of the light incident surface 19b in the scanning direction, it is possible to obtain an effect such as easy connection of the wiring to the LED 17, for example.
  • the plurality of regions on the light incident surface 19b are divided so that the dimensions in the scanning direction are substantially the same. In this way, the scanning period of the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 for each region of the light incident surface 19b can be made substantially the same, so that the control by the control unit 25 becomes easier.
  • the rotating reflector is constituted by a polygon mirror 22 that rotates in one direction.
  • each region on the light incident surface 19b can be scanned by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 rotating in one direction, which is particularly suitable for scanning the light incident surface 19b at a high speed.
  • the polygon mirror 22 has a regular polygonal shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis 22a. In this way, the surfaces that reflect the light from the LED 17 are all uniform in size. For example, if the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 22 is constant, the scanning range for the light incident surface 19b per unit time is constant. It can be.
  • the polygonal mirror 22 has a square shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis 22a. In this way, the angle range in which the light from the LED 17 can be reflected is approximately 180 degrees. Therefore, it is suitable particularly when the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 is large in the scanning direction, and the degree of freedom of arrangement in the polygon mirror 22 in the backlight device 12 is increased.
  • a condensing lens (condensing member) 22 is provided between the LED 17 and the polygon mirror 22 and condenses the light from the LED 17 and emits the light toward the polygon mirror 22.
  • the light emitted from the LED 17 can be efficiently supplied to the polygon mirror 22.
  • the light from the LED 17 can be incident on the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 without waste, and the utilization efficiency can be improved. Therefore, the luminance can be improved and the power consumption can be reduced. it can.
  • the condensing lens 22 condenses the light from the LED 17 so that the traveling direction of the light emitted toward the polygon mirror 22 is parallel to the light incident surface 19b. In this way, the light parallel to the light incident surface 19b is reflected by the polygon mirror 22 and angled, so that it can be incident on each region on the light incident surface 19b.
  • control unit 25 periodically blinks the LED 17 to change the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period.
  • PWM Pulse Width Modulation
  • the light guide member 19 is composed of a plurality of divided light guide members 19S divided into a plurality of regions on the light incident surface 19b. If it does in this way, the light which injected into each area
  • a low refractive index layer having a refractive index relatively lower than that of the divided light guide member 19S is interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S. This makes it difficult for the light in the divided light guide member 19S to be emitted to the low refractive index layer side, so that the light can be prevented from passing between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S, and the adjacent divided light guide member 19S can be prevented.
  • the optical independence of the optical member 19S can be ensured.
  • the light guide members 19 to be stacked are arranged so that the light incident surfaces 19b are flush with each other. In this way, when the light guide members 19 are stacked, the light incident surfaces 19b are aligned so that the light guide members 19 can be easily positioned, thereby improving workability. Excellent.
  • the polygon mirror 22 has a reflection surface 22b that reflects the light from the LED 17 and can be parallel to the light incident surface 19b, whereas the plurality of LEDs 17 arranged along the stacking direction are parallel to the reflection surface 22b. They are arranged in a straight line. In this way, the light emitted from the LEDs 17 arranged in the stacking direction is reflected by the reflecting surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22, and then enters the light incident surfaces 19b of the stacked light guide members 19. The optical path length until this can be made substantially equal for each LED 17. Thereby, it becomes easier to control the light emission state of each LED 17 by the control unit 25.
  • the light guide member 19 has a bottom surface 19c located on the opposite side of the light emitting surface 19a and parallel to the light emitting surface 19a. In this way, the order in which the light guide members 19 are stacked at the time of manufacturing the backlight device 12 is correct in comparison with the case where the light exit surface and the bottom surface are not parallel and the light guide member 19 is tapered. It is possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to discriminate between the time and the case where the stacking order is wrong, and the strength is also excellent.
  • the plurality of light guide members 19 to be stacked are relatively relative to the first light guide member 19A (the second light guide member 19B and the third light guide member 19C) disposed on the light emitting side. At least a second light guide member 19B (a third light guide member 19C and a fourth light guide member 19D) disposed on the side opposite to the light emitting side with respect to the first light guide member 19A is included.
  • the light guide member 19B has a support surface 19eB (support surface 19eC, support surface 19eD) that supports the bottom surface 19cA (the bottom surface 19cB, the bottom surface 19cC) of the first light guide member 19A, and the support surface 19eB
  • the light exit surface 19aB (light exit surface 19aC, light exit surface 19aD) is adjacent to the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface 19b side. In this way, the first light guide member 19A can be stably supported by the support surface 19eB, and workability when the first light guide member 19A is stacked on the second light guide member 19B during manufacturing.
  • the first light guide member 19A can be avoided from being laminated on the light output surface 19aB of the second light guide member 19B, the light from the light output surface 19aB is transmitted to the first light guide member 19A. It can be made to emit without going through.
  • the areas of the adjacent light emitting surfaces 19a are substantially equal. This makes it easy to control the drive of each LED 17 in adjusting the brightness per unit area in the light emitted from each light exit surface 19a.
  • the plurality of light guide members 19 to be stacked have the same dimensions in the scanning direction. In this way, when the plurality of light guide members 19 are stacked, the light guide members 19 can be stacked over the entire area in the scanning direction if the end faces in the scanning direction are aligned. Therefore, each light guide member 19 can be easily positioned and the workability is excellent.
  • the light guide member 19 has a bottom surface 19c located on the side opposite to the light emitting surface 19a.
  • the light guide member 19 is provided along the bottom surface 19c and includes a reflection sheet (reflecting member) that reflects light. In this way, by reflecting the light in the light guide member 19 by the reflection sheet 20, the light can be efficiently propagated in the light guide member 19 and the light is transmitted to the light emitting surface 19a. Can be launched.
  • the reflection sheet 20 covers the surface 19d of the light guide member 19 opposite to the light incident surface 19b. In this way, light propagating in the light guide member 19 can be prevented from being emitted from the surface 19d of the light guide member 19 opposite to the light incident surface 19b, thereby further improving the light utilization efficiency. Can be made.
  • the light source is the LED 17. In this way, high brightness and low power consumption can be achieved.
  • Embodiment 2 A second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 13 or FIG. In this Embodiment 2, what changed the shape of the light guide member 119 is shown. In addition, the overlapping description about the same structure, an effect
  • the second light guide member 119B to the fourth light guide member 119D in which the first light guide member 119A to the third light guide member 119C are laminated on the front side are shown in FIG.
  • a projecting light exiting portion 27 is provided that has light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD and projects to the front side of the support surface 119e.
  • Each protruding light exit portion 27 is formed such that the light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD that it has are flush with each other and the light exit surface 119aA of the first light guide member 119A is also flush. ing.
  • the projecting dimension of the projecting light output portion 27B of the second light guide member 119B is about the plate thickness dimension of the first light guide member 119A.
  • the projecting dimension of the projecting light output portion 27C of the third light guide member 119C is set to a size that is the sum of the plate thickness dimensions of the first light guide member 119A and the second light guide member 119B.
  • the projecting dimension of the projecting light output portion 27D of the fourth light guide member 119D is set to a size that is the sum of the plate thickness dimensions of the first light guide member 119A to the third light guide member 119C.
  • the following effects can be obtained.
  • the configuration of the backlight device 112 ′ is changed and the optical member 115 ′ is directly stacked on the light guide member 119, they are flush with each other.
  • the optical member 115 ' can be stably supported by the light emitting surfaces 119aA to 119aD having a shape.
  • the inclined surface 28 has a slope that rises to the front side in the depth direction viewed from the left side in FIG. 13 in the Y-axis direction, that is, from the light incident surface 119b side. Since the reflection sheet 120 is disposed along the inclined surface 28, the light that has reached the protruding light output portions 27B to 27D among the light propagating through the second light guide member 119B to the fourth light guide member 119D is not reflected. By being angled by the portion along the inclined surface 28 in the reflection sheet 120, the reflection sheet 120 is efficiently launched toward the light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD.
  • the light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD are located farther from the light source unit U (light incident surface 119b) than the first light guide member 119A. Although it is relatively inferior in terms of light utilization efficiency, light can be efficiently launched to the light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD by the inclined surface 28 described above, and therefore, between the first light guide member 119A and the first light guide member 119A. Differences in light use efficiency are less likely to occur.
  • the first light guide member 119A has a light exit surface 119aA relatively closer to the light source unit U (light incident surface 119b) than the second light guide member 119B to the fourth light guide member 119D. Even if the inclined surface 28 is not formed, sufficient light use efficiency is ensured. Rather, the first light guide member 119A can stabilize the support posture by setting the bottom surface 119cA in parallel with the support surface 119eB of the second light guide member 119B.
  • the second light guide member 119B (third light guide member 119C, fourth light guide member 119D) has the light emission surface 119aB (light emission surface 119aC, light emission surface 119aD).
  • a protruding light emitting portion 27 that protrudes further to the light emission side than the support surface 119eB (support surface 119eC, support surface 119eD).
  • the protruding light exiting portion 27 is configured to protrude to the light emitting side from the support surface 119eB, the first light guide member 119A (second light guide member 119B, third light guide member 119C).
  • the step can be reduced or eliminated between the light exit surface 119aA (light exit surface 119aB, light exit surface 119aC) of the light exit surface 119aB of the projecting light exit portion 27 of the second light guide member 119B.
  • the stability is excellent, and from when the light exits each light exit surface 119 a to the other members described above.
  • the difference in optical path length can be reduced or eliminated.
  • the protruding light exiting portion 27 in the second light guide member 119B is formed such that the light exit surface 119aB it has is flush with the light exit surface 119aA of the first light guide member 119A. In this way, a step can be eliminated between the light exit surface 119a of the first light guide member 119A and the light exit surface 119aB of the protruding light exit portion 27 of the second light guide member 119B.
  • the stability is extremely excellent, and the difference in the optical path length from when the light exits each light emitting surface 119a to the other member described above can be obtained. Can be resolved.
  • bottom surface 119cB bottom surface 119cC, bottom surface 119cD
  • a portion overlapping the protruding light emitting portion 27 when viewed in plan is directed in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface 119b side.
  • An inclined surface 28 having a gradient that rises toward the light emitting side is formed.
  • the light exit surface 119aB of the second light guide member 119B is relatively far from the light entrance surface 119b in the depth direction as compared to the light exit surface 119aA of the first light guide member 119A.
  • the protrusion having the light emitting surface 119aB among the bottom surface 119cB Since the inclined surface 28 is formed in a portion overlapping with the light emitting portion 27, the internal light can be efficiently launched toward the light emitting surface 119aB. Thereby, the light use efficiency in the second light guide member 119B can be improved, and a difference in the light use efficiency between the first light guide member 119A can be made difficult to occur.
  • a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 15 or FIG.
  • a pair of light source units 2U is provided and the number and arrangement of light guide members 219 are changed.
  • a pair of light source units 2U are arranged at both ends of the long side of the chassis 214. Specifically, a predetermined interval is provided between the long side plates 214b on the long side of the chassis 214 and the light guide member 219, and the light source units 2U are arranged in the spaces.
  • the LED 217, the LED substrate 218, the condenser lens 221, the polygon mirror 222, and the synchronization detection unit 223 constituting each light source unit 2U are arranged in a point symmetry with the center position of the light guide member 219 as a symmetric point.
  • the light guide member 219 is configured such that a set of four stacked in the Z-axis direction is arranged back-to-back in the Y-axis direction and sandwiched between the pair of light source units 2U as a whole. It is arranged. Therefore, the light emitting surface of the entire backlight device 212 is divided into 64 regions in a matrix form by the light emitting surfaces 219a of the light guide members 219. Such a configuration is more suitable for increasing the size of the backlight device 212.
  • Embodiment 4 A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In this Embodiment 4, what changed further the installation number and arrangement
  • the light guide member 319 includes eight divided light guide members 319 ⁇ / b> S divided in the X-axis direction, and four divided light guide members 319 ⁇ / b> S. Are arranged in such a manner that a pair formed by stacking layers is adjacent to each other in the X-axis direction and reversed in the Y-axis direction. Specifically, there are two types of groups in which the four divided light guide members 319S are stacked, and one group has the same divided light guide members 319S as shown in FIG. In the other set, as shown in FIG. 19, the divided light guide members 319 are arranged near the right side (upper side in FIG. 17). It is a thing.
  • the divided light guide members 319 ⁇ / b> S of each set are reversed and arranged in the Y-axis direction so that the sets adjacent to each other in the X-axis direction are the above-described one set and the other set.
  • each of the divided light guide members 319SA, 319SC, 319SE, and 319SG forming an odd-numbered set counted from the left end shown in FIG. 17 is arranged close to the left side of the figure as shown in FIG.
  • the split light incident surfaces 319bS are arranged facing the left side of the figure.
  • the light guide members 319SB, 319SD, 319SF, and 319SH that form even-numbered pairs counted from the left end shown in FIG. 17 are arranged close to the right side of the figure as shown in FIG.
  • the split light incident surface 319bS is arranged so as to face the right side of the figure.
  • the pair of light source units 3U that supply light to the light guide member 319 arranged as described above is controlled by the control unit 25 (see FIG. 6) as follows.
  • the lower light source unit 3U shown in FIG. 17 is referred to as a “first light source unit”, and a suffix A is added to the reference numeral, whereas the upper light source unit 3U is referred to as a “second light source unit”.
  • Subscript B shall be attached. That is, among the divided light guide members 319S, the divided light incident surfaces 319bS in the odd-numbered divided light guide members 319SA, 319SC, 319SE, and 319SG are reflected by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 322 forming the first light source unit 3UA.
  • the divided light incident surfaces 319bS in the even-numbered divided light guide members 319SB, 319SD, 319SF, and 319SH are controlled to be scanned by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 322 forming the second light source unit 3UB. It can be controlled by the unit 25. In this way, there is a non-scanning period in which the divided light incident surface 319bS is not scanned during the scanning period in which the reflected light from each light source unit 3U scans the divided light incident surface 319bS. Since a slight period (non-scanning period) during which the air layer AS between the adjacent divided light guide members 319S can be scanned can be continued, the light emission state of each LED 317 can be controlled more easily.
  • Embodiment 5 A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 20 or FIG.
  • This Embodiment 5 shows what changed arrangement
  • FIG. the overlapping description about the same structure, an effect
  • the light source unit 4U is disposed at one end of the short side of the chassis 414 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the light source unit 4U is disposed between the light guide member 419 and the side plate 414c on the right short side of the chassis 414 shown in FIG.
  • the LED board 418 and the synchronization detection unit 423 constituting the light source unit 4U are attached to the lower side plate 414b on the lower side shown in FIG.
  • the condenser lens 421 is arranged at a position closer to the LED 417 than the polygon mirror 422.
  • the polygon mirror 422 is disposed at a substantially central position in the entire short side direction of the light guide member 419 (Y-axis direction, scanning direction by reflected light described later). The polygon mirror 422 is rotated in the clockwise direction (arrow line direction) shown in FIG.
  • the surface facing the light source unit 4U is a light incident surface 419b.
  • the light incident surface 419b is linearly scanned from the lower side to the upper side shown in FIG. 20 along the Y-axis direction by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 422 constituting the light source unit 4U.
  • the light guide member 419 is divided along the entire long side direction (X-axis direction), and is divided into six divided guides in the short side direction (Y-axis direction, the scanning direction by reflected light from the polygon mirror 422). It is divided into optical members 419S, and the divided widths are substantially equal.
  • each split light incident surface 419bS of each split light guide member 419S via a polygon mirror 422.
  • six light guide members 419 are laminated in the Z-axis direction. Note that the laminated structure of the six light guide members 419 is the same as that described in the first embodiment except that the number of the light guide members 419 is increased, and thus a redundant description is omitted. Note that the LED 417 is arranged in parallel in the Z-axis direction in the same number (six) as the number of the light guide members 419 stacked.
  • a pair of light source units 5U are arranged at both ends on the short side of the chassis 514. Specifically, a predetermined interval is provided between the short-side side plates 514c and the light guide member 519 in the chassis 514, and the light source units 5U are disposed in the spaces.
  • the LED 517, the LED substrate 518, the condenser lens 521, the polygon mirror 522, and the synchronization detection unit 523 that constitute each light source unit 5U are arranged in a point symmetry with the center position of the light guide member 519 as a symmetric point.
  • the light guide member 519 is configured such that a set of four stacked in the Z-axis direction is arranged back-to-back in the X-axis direction and sandwiched between the pair of light source units 5U as a whole. It is arranged. Therefore, the light emitting surface of the entire backlight device 512 is divided into 48 regions in a matrix by each light emitting surface 519a of each light guide member 519. Such a configuration is suitable for increasing the size of the backlight device 512.
  • a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
  • a galvanometer mirror 29 is used in place of the polygon mirror 22 described in the first embodiment.
  • the galvanometer mirror 29 has a horizontally long plate shape and a surface facing the light guide member 19 side as a reflection surface 29b, and is rotatable around a rotation shaft 29a. Specifically, the galvanometer mirror 29 is reciprocally swung around the rotation axis 29a in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. The angle of the reflection surface 29b is changed in a time division manner, and the traveling direction of the light reflected by the reflection surface 29b is changed in a time division manner.
  • the reflected light from the galvanometer mirror 29 causes the light incident surface 19b (divided light incident surface 19bS) of the light guide member 19 (divided light guide member 19S) to move in the long side direction (X It is possible to scan linearly from the left side to the right side shown in FIG.
  • a resonant mirror can be cited, which can be used in place of the galvano mirror 29 described above.
  • the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described with reference to the above description and drawings.
  • the following embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention.
  • the present invention includes a structure in which the light guide member is not divided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, each of the light guide members 19A ′ to 19D ′ can be made one, and even in that case, the light-incident surface 19b ′ of FIG.
  • the light emission state of the LED 17 may be controlled in a time-sharing manner for each scanning period of the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 for each region divided by.
  • the polygon mirror is shown to be square when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis.
  • the polygon mirror is along the rotation axis 22a ′. It is also possible to use a polygon mirror 22 ′ that is a regular hexagon when viewed from the direction.
  • the shape of the polygon mirror viewed from the direction along the rotation axis may be other regular polygons such as a regular triangle, a regular pentagon, a regular heptagon, and a regular octagon. It is.
  • the shape of the polygon mirror viewed from the direction along the rotation axis may be a non-regular polygon such as an isosceles triangle or a trapezoid.
  • a polygon mirror, a galvano mirror, and a resonant mirror are exemplified as the rotating reflector.
  • MEMS Micro Electro Mechanical System
  • the number of laminated light guide members and the number of installed LEDs are shown to be the same. However, it is not always necessary to match both, for example, compared to the number of laminated light guide members. Those having a small number of installed LEDs and those having a large number are also included in the present invention.
  • each of the above-described embodiments one LED is provided for each stage (first LED to fourth LED).
  • the present invention is also provided with a plurality of LEDs for each stage. include. In this way, the luminance can be improved. It should be noted that light from a plurality of LEDs in each stage can be irradiated while efficiently condensing the polygon mirror by changing the optical design of the condenser lens.
  • the number of light guide members stacked is appropriately changed to other than four or six. be able to.
  • the number of LEDs arranged in the stacking direction is also changed to be the same as the number of light guide members stacked.
  • the light incident surfaces of the stacked light guide members are arranged so that they are flush with each other.
  • the light incident surfaces of the stacked light guide members are surfaces. What was made into the arrangement
  • positioning which does not form one shape is also contained in this invention. In that case, it is preferable to make the optical path lengths until the light emitted from the LEDs of each stage reaches the light incident surface by changing the shape of the reflecting surface of the polygon mirror or the arrangement of the LEDs.
  • control unit performs PWM control of the light emission state of the LED, but it is of course possible to control the LED light emission state by other methods.
  • the light emission state of the LED can be controlled in a time-sharing manner by changing the drive voltage for driving the LED in a time-sharing manner.
  • the division width in the light guide member that is, the case where the dimensions in the scanning direction in each division light guide member are substantially equalized, but the division width in the light guide member is set to be different. It is also possible.
  • each light guide member is divided into six or eight.
  • the number of divisions of each light guide member is appropriately changed to other than six and eight. be able to.
  • the left side plate shown in FIG. 3 is attached with the LED substrate and the synchronization detection unit.
  • the LED substrate and the synchronization detection unit are attached to the side plate on the right side.
  • the lower side plate shown in FIG. 20 is attached with the LED substrate and the synchronization detection unit.
  • the LED board and the synchronization detection unit may be attached to the upper side plate shown in FIG.
  • the LED board is attached to the side plate of the chassis.
  • a heat sink having an L-shaped cross section is prepared, the LED board is attached to the heat sink, and the heat sink is attached to the chassis. It may be attached to the bottom plate.
  • one or two light source units are arranged in the chassis, but three or four light source units are arranged in the chassis. included.
  • the polygon mirror (galvano mirror) is arranged at the substantially central position in the scanning direction on the light incident surface.
  • the polygon mirror is displaced from the central position. What was made into the arrangement
  • positioning was also included in this invention.
  • the LED is arranged at the position that is the end in the scanning direction on the light incident surface. Those arranged close to each other are also included in the present invention.
  • the synchronization detection unit is attached to the same side plate as the LED substrate and is disposed at a position between the LED and the light guide member. Can be attached to a side plate (for example, the opposite side plate) different from the LED substrate. Furthermore, it is also possible to place the synchronization detection unit on the same side plate as the LED substrate, and arrange the LED between the light guide member and the LED.
  • the air layer is used as the low refractive index layer interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members.
  • a low refractive index layer made of a low refractive index material may be used. Is possible.
  • the air layer is interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members.
  • a reflective layer made of a reflective sheet having excellent light reflectivity is used instead of the air layer. It is also possible.
  • the LED is used as the light source.
  • other types of light sources can of course be used.
  • a specific example of the display period of one display image on the liquid crystal panel is 1/60 seconds or 1/120 seconds. It is also possible to change to 240 seconds or the like, and the scanning period for the light incident surface by the reflected light of the rotating reflector may be changed accordingly. In addition, the specific numerical value of the above-described display period can be appropriately changed in addition to the above.
  • the LED substrates and the synchronization detection units in the pair of light source units are attached to different side plates, but these are attached to the same side plate.
  • the polygon mirror that forms one light source unit and the polygon mirror that forms the other light source unit may be set so that the rotation directions are opposite.
  • the bottom surfaces of the first light guide member to the third light guide member and the support surfaces of the second light guide member to the fourth light guide member that receive the bottom surface are parallel to each other.
  • the present invention includes a configuration in which the bottom surface and the support surface are not parallel to each other.
  • the light output surfaces of the light guide members stacked on each other are shown to have the same area.
  • the areas of the light output surfaces of the light guide members stacked on each other are Partially or entirely different settings are possible.
  • the width dimensions of the light guide members stacked on each other are the same, but the width dimensions of the light guide members stacked on each other are set to be partially or completely different. It is also possible.
  • the LEDs arranged along the light guide member stacking direction are linearly arranged.
  • the LEDs aligned along the light guide member stacking direction are arranged in the X axis. Those that are displaced in the direction or the Y-axis direction are also included in the present invention.
  • the reflection sheet arranged along the bottom surface of the light guide member is a single sheet covering the surface opposite to the light incident surface.
  • the present invention includes a configuration in which two reflection sheets are configured and divided into one that covers the bottom surface of the light guide member and one that covers the surface opposite to the light incident surface of the light guide member.
  • the reflection sheet covers the entire support surface of the light guide member laminated on the back side, but the support surface of the light guide member on which the reflection sheet is laminated on the back side is partially What was made into the form covered automatically is also contained in this invention.
  • the reflection sheet is configured to cover the surface opposite to the light incident surface in addition to the bottom surface of the light guide member. It is also possible to adopt a form in which only the bottom surface of the light incident surface is covered and the surface opposite to the light incident surface is not covered.
  • the liquid crystal panel is illustrated in a vertically placed state in which the short side direction coincides with the vertical direction, but the liquid crystal panel matches the long side direction with the vertical direction. What is set in a vertical state is also included in the present invention.
  • the TFT is used as the switching element of the liquid crystal display device.
  • the present invention can also be applied to a liquid crystal display device using a switching element other than the TFT (for example, a thin film diode (TFD)), and color display.
  • a switching element other than the TFT for example, a thin film diode (TFD)
  • color display for example, a liquid crystal display device
  • the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device that displays black and white.
  • the liquid crystal display device using the liquid crystal panel as the display panel has been exemplified.
  • the present invention can be applied to display devices using other types of display panels.
  • the television receiver provided with the tuner is exemplified, but the present invention is also applicable to a display device not provided with the tuner.
  • SYMBOLS 10 Liquid crystal display device (display device), 11 ... Liquid crystal panel (display panel), 12, 212, 512 ... Backlight device (illumination device), 17, 117, 217, 317, 418 ... LED (light source), 19, 119, 219, 319, 419, 519 ... light guide member, 19A, 119A ... first light guide member, 19B, 119B ... second light guide member (first light guide member), 19C, 119C ... third light guide member (1st light guide member, 2nd light guide member), 19D, 119D ... 4th light guide member (2nd light guide member), 19S, 319S, 419S ...

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Planar Illumination Modules (AREA)

Abstract

The objective of the invention is to partially control the light emission status in an illumination apparatus and to achieve low cost. A backlight apparatus (12) according to the invention comprises a plurality of light guide members (19) each of which has a light incidence surface (19b) on which a light is incident and a light emergence surface (19a) from which the incident light is caused to emerge. The plurality of light guide members (19) are stacked in such a manner that the light emergence surfaces (19a) of the respective light guide members (19) are adjacent to each other in the depth direction viewed from the light incidence surfaces (19b) thereof. The backlight apparatus (12) further comprises: a plurality of LEDs (17) that are aligned along the stacking direction of the light guide members (19); a polygon mirror (22) that is rotated about an axis extending along the stacking direction of the light guide members (19), while reflecting lights from the LEDs (17) and using the reflected lights to scan the light incidence surfaces (19b); and a control unit (25) that controls the light emission statuses of the LEDs (17) in such a time division manner that the light emission statuses of the LEDs (17) are associated with scan periods of the respective reflected lights corresponding to a plurality of regions into which the light incidence surfaces (19b) are separated in the scan direction of the reflected lights from the polygon mirror (22).

Description

照明装置、表示装置、及びテレビ受信装置Lighting device, display device, and television receiver
 本発明は、照明装置、表示装置、及びテレビ受信装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a lighting device, a display device, and a television receiver.
 近年、テレビ受信装置をはじめとする画像表示装置の表示素子は、従来のブラウン管から液晶パネルやプラズマディスプレイパネルなどの薄型の表示パネルに移行しつつあり、画像表示装置の薄型化を可能としている。液晶表示装置は、これに用いる液晶パネルが自発光しないため、別途に照明装置としてバックライト装置を必要としており、バックライト装置はその機構によって直下型とエッジライト型とに大別されている。液晶表示装置の一層の薄型化を実現するには、エッジライト型のバックライト装置を用いるのが好ましく、その一例として下記特許文献1に記載されたものが知られている。 In recent years, the display elements of image display devices such as television receivers are shifting from conventional cathode ray tubes to thin display panels such as liquid crystal panels and plasma display panels, which enables thinning of image display devices. Since the liquid crystal panel used for the liquid crystal display device does not emit light by itself, a backlight device is separately required as a lighting device, and the backlight device is roughly classified into a direct type and an edge light type according to the mechanism. In order to further reduce the thickness of the liquid crystal display device, it is preferable to use an edge light type backlight device, and an example described in Patent Document 1 below is known.
特開2001-92370号公報JP 2001-92370 A
(発明が解決しようとする課題)
 上記した特許文献1に記載されたものは、バックライト装置の端部に複数並列して配された光源と、光源からの光を導光して液晶パネル側に向けて出射させる導光板とを備えており、導光板は、光源の並列方向と直交する方向に沿って延在する形態とされるとともに光源の並列方向に沿って複数が並列配置されている。しかしながら、このものでは、隣り合う導光板間で発光状態を制御することは可能であるものの、個々の導光板については、全体が発光するため、光源の並列方向と直交する方向について部分的に発光状態を制御することができなかった。しかも、このものでは、光入射面に沿って多数の光源を並列配置する必要があるため、光源に係るコストが高くなりがちとなる、といった問題が生じており、低コスト化などを図る上で問題となっていた。
(Problems to be solved by the invention)
In the above-described Patent Document 1, a plurality of light sources arranged in parallel at the end of the backlight device and a light guide plate that guides light from the light sources and emits the light toward the liquid crystal panel side. The light guide plate is configured to extend along a direction orthogonal to the parallel direction of the light sources, and a plurality of light guide plates are arranged in parallel along the parallel direction of the light sources. However, in this case, although it is possible to control the light emission state between adjacent light guide plates, since the entire light guide plate emits light, light is partially emitted in the direction orthogonal to the parallel direction of the light sources. The state could not be controlled. In addition, in this case, since it is necessary to arrange a large number of light sources along the light incident surface, there is a problem that the cost of the light sources tends to increase. It was a problem.
 本発明は上記のような事情に基づいて完成されたものであって、部分的に発光状態を制御するとともに低コスト化を図ることを目的とする。 The present invention has been completed based on the above situation, and aims to partially control the light emission state and reduce the cost.
(課題を解決するための手段)
 本発明の照明装置は、光が入射される光入射面と、入射した光を出射させる光出射面とを有するとともに、互いの前記光出射面同士が前記光入射面側から視た奥行き方向について隣り合う形となるよう積層して配される複数の導光部材と、前記導光部材の積層方向に沿って並んで配される複数の光源と、前記導光部材の積層方向に沿った軸周りに回動されつつ前記光源からの光を反射し、その反射光により前記光入射面を走査する回動反射体と、前記光入射面を前記回動反射体からの前記反射光による走査方向について複数の領域に区分したとき、各領域に対する前記反射光の走査期間に対応付けて前記光源の発光状態を時分割して制御する制御部とを備える。
(Means for solving problems)
The illumination device of the present invention has a light incident surface on which light is incident and a light emitting surface that emits the incident light, and the light emitting surfaces of each other are in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side. A plurality of light guide members arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, a plurality of light sources arranged side by side along the lamination direction of the light guide members, and an axis along the lamination direction of the light guide members A rotating reflector that reflects light from the light source while rotating around and scans the light incident surface with the reflected light, and a scanning direction by the reflected light from the rotating reflector on the light incident surface And a control unit that controls the light emission state of the light source in a time-sharing manner in association with a scanning period of the reflected light with respect to each region.
 このように、複数の導光部材が、互いの光出射面が光入射面側から視た奥行き方向について隣り合う形となるよう積層されるのに対し、光源が導光部材の積層方向について複数並んで配されており、各導光部材の光入射面に対して積層方向について対応する各光源からの光が回動反射体を介して入射されるから、各導光部材に対応する各光源の駆動を制御することで、各導光部材における隣り合う各光出射面からの出射光量を選択的に制御することができる。 As described above, the plurality of light guide members are stacked so that the light emission surfaces thereof are adjacent to each other in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side, whereas the light sources are plural in the stacking direction of the light guide members. Each light source corresponding to each light guide member is arranged side by side and light from each light source corresponding to the stacking direction is incident on the light incident surface of each light guide member via the rotating reflector. By controlling this driving, it is possible to selectively control the amount of light emitted from each adjacent light exit surface of each light guide member.
 その上で、光源からの光を反射する回動反射体は、導光部材の積層方向に沿った軸周りに回動されることで、反射光を光入射面に走査させることができ、その走査方向が上記した隣り合う光出射面の並び方向と交差する関係にある。そして、制御部は、回動反射体からの反射光による走査方向について区分された光入射面における各領域に対する反射光の走査期間に対応付けて光源の発光状態を時分割して制御することで、各領域に対する反射光の入射光量、並びに光入射面の各領域に対応する光出射面における各領域からの出射光量を選択的に制御することができる。 In addition, the rotating reflector that reflects the light from the light source can be rotated around an axis along the stacking direction of the light guide member to scan the reflected light on the light incident surface. The scanning direction intersects the above-described arrangement direction of the adjacent light emitting surfaces. Then, the control unit controls the light emission state of the light source in a time-sharing manner in association with the scanning period of the reflected light with respect to each region on the light incident surface divided in the scanning direction by the reflected light from the rotating reflector. It is possible to selectively control the incident light amount of the reflected light with respect to each region and the emitted light amount from each region on the light emitting surface corresponding to each region of the light incident surface.
 従って、各光出射面の集合によって構成される当該照明装置における発光面は、互いに隣り合う光出射面の並び方向と、光出射面の並び方向に対して交差する反射光による光入射面の走査方向とに関してマトリクス状に区分されるとともにその区分された各領域毎に発光量を部分的に制御することが可能とされる。しかも、本発明によれば、従来のように多数の光源を並列配置して各光源の発光状態を個別に調整するようにしたものに比べると、光源の使用数を削減することができ、例えば光源に係るコストの低減を図ることができる。 Therefore, the light emitting surface in the illumination device constituted by the set of the light emitting surfaces is a scanning of the light incident surface by the reflected light intersecting the alignment direction of the light emitting surfaces adjacent to each other and the alignment direction of the light emitting surfaces. It is possible to partially control the light emission amount for each of the divided areas while being divided in a matrix with respect to the direction. Moreover, according to the present invention, the number of light sources used can be reduced compared to a conventional arrangement in which a large number of light sources are arranged in parallel and the light emission state of each light source is adjusted individually. Costs related to the light source can be reduced.
 本発明の実施態様として、次の構成が好ましい。
(1)積層される前記導光部材の数と、前記導光部材の積層方向に沿って並んで配される前記光源の数とが一致している。このようにすれば、積層される各導光部材に対して各光源を個別に対応付けて配することができるから、各光源の発光状態を個別に制御することで、対応する各導光部材における光出射面からの出射光量を個別に制御することができる。
The following configuration is preferable as an embodiment of the present invention.
(1) The number of the light guide members to be stacked and the number of the light sources arranged side by side in the stacking direction of the light guide members are the same. If it does in this way, since each light source can be individually matched and arranged with respect to each light guide member laminated, each light guide member corresponding by controlling individually the light emission state of each light source. The amount of light emitted from the light exit surface can be individually controlled.
(2)前記光源及び前記回動反射体の並び方向と、前記回動反射体及び前記導光部材の並び方向とが互いに略直交するものとされる。このようにすれば、仮に光源、回動反射体及び導光部材が一直線に並んだ場合に比べると、照明装置全体を小型に保つことができる。 (2) The alignment direction of the light source and the rotating reflector and the alignment direction of the rotating reflector and the light guide member are substantially orthogonal to each other. If it does in this way, compared with the case where a light source, a rotation reflector, and a light guide member are located in a line, the whole illuminating device can be kept small.
(3)前記回動反射体は、前記走査方向について前記光入射面のほぼ中央位置に配されている。このようにすれば、回動反射体にて反射された光のうち、走査方向について光入射面の一方の端部に至る光と、他方の端部に至る光とで光路長がほぼ同等となる。従って、例えば回動反射体からの反射光による光入射面の各領域の走査期間を設定するのが簡便となる、などの効果を得ることができる。 (3) The rotating reflector is disposed at a substantially central position of the light incident surface in the scanning direction. In this way, among the light reflected by the rotating reflector, the light path lengths of the light reaching one end of the light incident surface and the light reaching the other end in the scanning direction are substantially equal. Become. Therefore, for example, it is possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to set the scanning period of each region of the light incident surface by the reflected light from the rotating reflector.
(4)前記光源は、前記走査方向について前記光入射面の端側に配されている。このようにすれば、仮に光源を走査方向について光入射面の中央側に配した場合に比べると、例えば光源に対する配線の接続が容易になるなどの効果を得ることができる。 (4) The light source is disposed on an end side of the light incident surface in the scanning direction. In this case, compared to a case where the light source is arranged on the center side of the light incident surface in the scanning direction, it is possible to obtain an effect such as easy connection of wiring to the light source.
(5)前記光入射面における前記複数の領域は、前記走査方向についての寸法が互いにほぼ同じとなるよう区分されている。このようにすれば、光入射面の各領域に対する回動反射体からの反射光による走査期間をほぼ同じとすることができるから、制御部による制御がより容易なものとなる。 (5) The plurality of regions on the light incident surface are partitioned so that the dimensions in the scanning direction are substantially the same. In this way, the scanning period of the reflected light from the rotating reflector with respect to each region of the light incident surface can be made substantially the same, so that the control by the control unit becomes easier.
(6)前記回動反射体は、一方向に回転するポリゴンミラーにより構成されている。このようにすれば、一方向に回転するポリゴンミラーによる反射光により光入射面における各領域を走査することができるから、特に光入射面を高速で走査する場合に好適となる。 (6) The rotating reflector is constituted by a polygon mirror that rotates in one direction. In this way, each region on the light incident surface can be scanned by the reflected light from the polygon mirror rotating in one direction, which is particularly suitable for scanning the light incident surface at high speed.
(7)前記ポリゴンミラーは、その回転軸に沿う方向から視た平面形状が正多角形とされる。このようにすれば、光源からの光を反射する面が全て均一な大きさとされるから、例えばポリゴンミラーにおける回転速度を一定とすれば、単位時間当たりの光入射面に対する走査範囲を一定とすることができる。 (7) The polygonal mirror has a regular polygonal shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis. In this way, the surfaces that reflect the light from the light source are all uniform in size. For example, if the rotation speed of the polygon mirror is constant, the scanning range for the light incident surface per unit time is constant. be able to.
(8)前記ポリゴンミラーは、その回転軸に沿う方向から視た平面形状が正方形とされる。このようにすれば、光源からの光を反射可能な角度範囲がほぼ180度となる。従って、特に導光部材における光入射面が走査方向について大きな場合に好適となり、また当該照明装置における回動反射体における配置の自由度が高くなる。 (8) The polygon mirror has a square shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis. In this way, the angle range in which light from the light source can be reflected is approximately 180 degrees. Therefore, it is suitable particularly when the light incident surface of the light guide member is large in the scanning direction, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rotating reflector in the illumination device is increased.
(9)前記光源と前記回動反射体との間に介在し、前記光源からの光を集光して前記回動反射体に向けて出射させる集光部材を備える。このようにすれば、光源から発せられた光を回動反射体に対して効率的に供給することができる。これにより、導光部材の光入射面に対して光源からの光を無駄なく入射させることができて利用効率を向上させることができるので、輝度の向上や低消費電力化を図ることができる。 (9) A condensing member that is interposed between the light source and the rotating reflector and condenses the light from the light source and emits the light toward the rotating reflector. In this way, the light emitted from the light source can be efficiently supplied to the rotating reflector. Thereby, the light from the light source can be incident on the light incident surface of the light guide member without waste, and the utilization efficiency can be improved, so that the luminance can be improved and the power consumption can be reduced.
(10)前記集光部材は、前記回動反射体に向けて出射させる光の進行方向が、前記光入射面に並行するよう、前記光源からの光を集光するものとされる。このようにすれば、光入射面に並行する光を回動反射体によって反射して角度付けすることで、光入射面における各領域に入射させることができる。 (10) The light condensing member condenses light from the light source so that a traveling direction of light emitted toward the rotating reflector is parallel to the light incident surface. If it does in this way, it can be made to inject into each area | region in a light-incidence surface by reflecting and angling the light parallel to a light-incidence surface by a rotation reflector.
(11)前記制御部は、前記光源を周期的に点滅させ、点灯期間と消灯期間との時間比率を変化させるようにしている。このように、光源の発光状態を、いわゆるPWM(Pulse Width Modulation:パルス幅変調)方式により制御しているので、光源に付与する電圧値を一定にすることができてその制御に係る回路構成を簡単なものとすることができ、また調光範囲を十分に大きく確保できて光源の発光状態をより適切に制御することができる。 (11) The control unit blinks the light source periodically to change the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period. In this way, the light emission state of the light source is controlled by a so-called PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) method, so that the voltage value applied to the light source can be made constant, and the circuit configuration related to the control can be changed. It can be made simple, and a light control range can be secured sufficiently large, and the light emission state of the light source can be controlled more appropriately.
(12)前記導光部材は、前記光入射面における前記複数の領域毎に分割された複数の分割導光部材から構成される。このようにすれば、光入射面における各領域に入射した光を、各分割導光部材により個別に導光させてから出射させることができる。 (12) The light guide member includes a plurality of divided light guide members divided for each of the plurality of regions on the light incident surface. If it does in this way, the light which injected into each area | region in a light-incidence surface can be made to radiate | emit, after being individually guided by each division | segmentation light guide member.
(13)隣り合う前記分割導光部材の間には、前記分割導光部材よりも相対的に屈折率が低い低屈折率層が介在している。このようにすれば、分割導光部材内の光が低屈折率層側に出射し難くなるから、隣り合う分割導光部材間で光が行き交うのを防ぐことができ、隣り合う分割導光部材の光学的な独立性を担保することができる。また、各分割導光部材からの出射光量を十分に確保できて輝度の向上を図ることができる。 (13) A low refractive index layer having a refractive index relatively lower than that of the divided light guide member is interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members. If it does in this way, since it will become difficult to radiate | emit the light in a division | segmentation light guide member to the low-refractive-index layer side, it can prevent that light crosses between adjacent division | segmentation light guide members, and an adjacent division | segmentation light guide member The optical independence can be ensured. In addition, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of light emitted from each divided light guide member and improve luminance.
(14)積層される複数の前記導光部材は、前記光入射面同士が互いに面一状をなすよう配されている。このようにすれば、複数の導光部材を積層する際に、各光入射面を面一状に揃えることで、各導光部材の位置決めを容易に図ることができて作業性に優れる。 (14) The plurality of light guide members to be stacked are arranged such that the light incident surfaces are flush with each other. If it does in this way, when laminating | stacking a some light guide member, positioning of each light guide member can be aimed at easily by aligning each light-incidence surface in the same shape, and it is excellent in workability | operativity.
(15)前記回動反射体は、前記光源からの光を反射するとともに前記光入射面に並行可能な反射面を有するのに対し、前記積層方向に沿って並ぶ複数の前記光源は、前記反射面に並行するよう直線的に並んで配されている。このようにすれば、積層方向に沿って並ぶ各光源から発せられた光が回動反射体の反射面にて反射されてから、積層された各導光部材の各光入射面に入射するまでの光路長を、各光源毎にほぼ等しくすることができる。これにより、制御部により各光源の発光状態を制御するのがより容易なものとなる。 (15) The rotating reflector has a reflecting surface that reflects light from the light source and can be parallel to the light incident surface, whereas a plurality of the light sources arranged along the stacking direction has the reflecting surface. They are arranged in a straight line parallel to the surface. According to this configuration, the light emitted from the light sources arranged in the stacking direction is reflected by the reflecting surface of the rotating reflector and then enters the light incident surfaces of the stacked light guide members. Can be made substantially equal for each light source. Thereby, it becomes easier to control the light emission state of each light source by the control unit.
(16)前記導光部材は、前記光出射面とは反対側に位置し且つ前記光出射面に並行する底面を有している。このようにすれば、仮に光出射面と底面とが並行せず導光部材が先細り状をなす場合との比較において、当該照明装置の製造時に導光部材の積層順が正しかったときと、同積層順を誤ったときとを判別し易くなるなどの効果が得られ、さらには強度上も優れる。 (16) The light guide member has a bottom surface located on the opposite side of the light emitting surface and parallel to the light emitting surface. In this way, in comparison with the case where the light emitting surface and the bottom surface are not parallel and the light guide member is tapered, the same as when the light guide member is stacked in the correct order when the lighting device is manufactured. It is possible to obtain an effect such that it is easy to distinguish when the stacking order is wrong, and the strength is also excellent.
(17)積層される複数の前記導光部材には、相対的に光出射側に配される第1導光部材と、相対的に前記第1導光部材に対して前記光出射側とは反対側に配される第2導光部材とが少なくとも含まれており、前記第2導光部材は、前記第1導光部材が有する前記底面を支持する支持面を有するとともに、この支持面に対して前記光入射面側から視た奥行き方向について隣り合う形で前記光出射面を有している。このようにすれば、支持面によって第1導光部材を安定的に支持することができて製造時に第2導光部材に対して第1導光部材を積層する際の作業性に優れるとともに、第2導光部材が有する光出射面に対して第1導光部材が積層されることが避けられるので、同光出射面からの光を第1導光部材を介することなく出射させることができる。 (17) The plurality of light guide members to be stacked include a first light guide member relatively disposed on a light output side and a light output side relatively to the first light guide member. At least a second light guide member disposed on the opposite side, and the second light guide member has a support surface that supports the bottom surface of the first light guide member, and the support surface includes On the other hand, it has the said light-projection surface in the form adjacent to the depth direction seen from the said light-incidence surface side. In this way, the first light guide member can be stably supported by the support surface, and the workability when the first light guide member is stacked on the second light guide member during manufacturing is excellent. Since it is avoided that the first light guide member is laminated on the light exit surface of the second light guide member, light from the light exit surface can be emitted without passing through the first light guide member. .
(18)前記第2導光部材には、前記光出射面を有するとともに前記支持面よりも前記光出射側に突出する突出出光部が設けられている。このようにすれば、突出出光部が支持面よりも光出射側に突出する形態とされているから、第1導光部材が有する光出射面と、第2導光部材における突出出光部が有する光出射面との間で段差を緩和または解消することができる。これにより、例えば光出射面に他の部材(光学部材など)を載せた場合の安定性に優れ、また光が各光出射面を出射してから上記した他の部材に達するまでの光路長の差を緩和または解消することができる。 (18) The second light guide member is provided with a protruding light output portion that has the light output surface and protrudes further toward the light output side than the support surface. If it does in this way, since it is set as the form which a protrusion light-emitting part protrudes in the light-projection side rather than a support surface, it has the light-projection surface in a 1st light guide member, and the protrusion light-projection part in a 2nd light guide member It is possible to reduce or eliminate the step between the light exit surface. Thereby, for example, the stability when the other member (such as an optical member) is placed on the light exit surface is excellent, and the optical path length from when the light exits each light exit surface to the other member described above is improved. The difference can be mitigated or eliminated.
(19)前記第2導光部材における前記突出出光部は、有している前記光出射面が、前記第1導光部材が有する前記光出射面と面一状をなすよう形成されている。このようにすれば、第1導光部材が有する光出射面と、第2導光部材における突出出光部が有する光出射面との間で段差を解消することができる。これにより、例えば光出射面に他の部材を載せた場合の安定性に極めて優れ、また光が各光出射面を出射してから上記した他の部材に達するまでの光路長の差を解消することができる。 (19) The protruding light exit portion of the second light guide member is formed such that the light exit surface thereof is flush with the light exit surface of the first light guide member. If it does in this way, a level difference can be eliminated between the light emission surface which the 1st light guide member has, and the light emission surface which the projection light emission part in the 2nd light guide member has. Thereby, for example, when the other member is placed on the light exit surface, the stability is extremely excellent, and the difference in the optical path length from when the light exits each light exit surface to the other member described above is eliminated. be able to.
(20)前記第2導光部材が有する前記底面のうち、平面に視て前記突出出光部と重畳する部分には、前記光入射面側から視た奥行き方向に向けて前記光出射側に立ち上がるような勾配を持つ傾斜面が形成されている。このようにすれば、第2導光部材が有する光出射面は、第1導光部材が有する光出射面に比べると、光入射面から上記奥行き方向について相対的に遠い位置にあるため、光入射面に入射した光を光出射面にまで導いて出射させる上での光の利用効率の点で相対的に劣るものの、底面のうち光出射面を有する突出出光部と重畳する部分に傾斜面を形成しているから、内部の光を光出射面に向けて効率的に立ち上げることができる。これにより、第2導光部材における光の利用効率を改善することができ、第1導光部材との間で光の利用効率に差が生じ難くすることができる。 (20) A portion of the bottom surface of the second light guide member that overlaps with the protruding light output portion when seen in a plane rises toward the light emission side in a depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side. An inclined surface having such a gradient is formed. In this case, the light exit surface of the second light guide member is relatively far from the light entrance surface in the depth direction as compared to the light exit surface of the first light guide member. Although it is relatively inferior in terms of light utilization efficiency in guiding the light incident on the incident surface to the light exit surface and emitting it, an inclined surface is formed on the portion of the bottom surface that overlaps the protruding light output portion having the light exit surface. Thus, the internal light can be efficiently launched toward the light exit surface. Thereby, the utilization efficiency of the light in the 2nd light guide member can be improved, and it can be made hard to produce a difference in the utilization efficiency of light between the 1st light guide member.
(21)積層される複数の前記導光部材は、隣り合う前記光出射面同士の面積がほぼ等しいものとされる。このようにすれば、各光出射面からの出射光における単位面積当たりの明るさを調整する上で、各光源の駆動を制御するのが容易なものとなる。 (21) In the plurality of light guide members to be stacked, the areas of the light emitting surfaces adjacent to each other are substantially equal. This makes it easy to control the drive of each light source in adjusting the brightness per unit area in the light emitted from each light exit surface.
(22)積層される複数の前記導光部材は、前記走査方向についての寸法が互いに等しいものとされる。このようにすれば、複数の導光部材を積層するにあたり、互いに走査方向についての端面を揃えた状態とすれば、走査方向について各導光部材同士を全域にわたって積層させることができる。従って、各導光部材を容易に位置決めすることができて作業性に優れる。 (22) The plurality of light guide members to be stacked have the same dimension in the scanning direction. In this way, when laminating a plurality of light guide members, if the end faces in the scanning direction are aligned with each other, the light guide members can be laminated over the entire area in the scanning direction. Therefore, each light guide member can be easily positioned and the workability is excellent.
(23)前記導光部材は、前記光出射面とは反対側に位置する底面を有しており、前記底面に沿って配されるとともに光を反射させる反射部材が備えられている。このようにすれば、反射部材により導光部材内の光を反射させることで、導光部材内において光を効率的に伝播させることができるとともに光を光出射面に向けて立ち上げることができる。 (23) The light guide member has a bottom surface located on the side opposite to the light emitting surface, and is provided with a reflective member that is disposed along the bottom surface and reflects light. If it does in this way, light can be efficiently propagated in a light guide member by reflecting the light in a light guide member with a reflection member, and light can be raised toward a light-projection surface. .
(24)前記反射部材は、前記導光部材における前記光入射面とは反対側の面を覆うものとされる。このようにすれば、導光部材内を伝播する光が導光部材における光入射面とは反対側の面から出射するのを防ぐことができ、もって光の利用効率をより向上させることができる。 (24) The reflection member covers a surface of the light guide member opposite to the light incident surface. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the light which propagates the inside of a light guide member radiate | emits from the surface on the opposite side to the light-incidence surface in a light guide member, and can improve the utilization efficiency of light more. .
(25)前記光源は、LEDとされる。このようにすれば、高輝度化及び低消費電力化などを図ることができる。 (25) The light source is an LED. In this way, high brightness and low power consumption can be achieved.
 次に、上記課題を解決するために、本発明の表示装置は、上記記載の照明装置と、前記照明装置からの光を利用して表示を行う表示パネルとを備える。 Next, in order to solve the above problem, a display device of the present invention includes the above-described illumination device and a display panel that performs display using light from the illumination device.
 このような表示装置によると、表示パネルに対して光を供給する照明装置が、部分的に発光状態を制御可能とされるとともに光源の使用数を削減されたものであるため、表示品位の向上を図ることができるとともに製造コストの低減などを図ることが可能となる。 According to such a display device, the lighting device that supplies light to the display panel can partially control the light emission state and reduce the number of light sources used, thereby improving display quality. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost and the like.
 前記表示パネルとしては液晶パネルを例示することができる。このような表示装置は液晶表示装置として、種々の用途、例えばテレビやパソコンのディスプレイ等に適用でき、特に大型画面用として好適である。 A liquid crystal panel can be exemplified as the display panel. Such a display device can be applied as a liquid crystal display device to various uses such as a display of a television or a personal computer, and is particularly suitable for a large screen.
(発明の効果)
 本発明によれば、部分的に発光状態を制御するとともに低コスト化を図ることができる。
(The invention's effect)
According to the present invention, it is possible to partially control the light emission state and reduce the cost.
本発明の実施形態1に係るテレビ受信装置の概略構成を示す分解斜視図1 is an exploded perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a television receiver according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. テレビ受信装置が備える液晶表示装置の概略構成を示す分解斜視図The exploded perspective view which shows schematic structure of the liquid crystal display device with which a television receiver is equipped 液晶表示装置に備わるバックライト装置におけるシャーシと導光部材と光源ユニットとの配置構成を示す平面図The top view which shows the arrangement structure of the chassis in the backlight apparatus with which a liquid crystal display device is equipped, the light guide member, and the light source unit. 図3のiv-iv線断面図Sectional view taken along line iv-iv in FIG. 図3のv-v線断面図V-v sectional view of FIG. LEDの駆動制御について説明するためのブロック図Block diagram for explaining LED drive control 光源ユニットの動作を説明するためのものであって、反射光が第1分割光入射面に入射した状態を示す平面図The top view for demonstrating operation | movement of a light source unit, Comprising: The reflected light injects into the 1st division | segmentation light incident surface 光源ユニットの動作を説明するためのものであって、反射光が第3分割光入射面に入射した状態を示す平面図The top view for demonstrating operation | movement of a light source unit, Comprising: The reflected light injects into the 3rd division | segmentation light incident surface 光源ユニットの動作を説明するためのものであって、反射光が第6分割光入射面に入射した状態を示す平面図The top view for demonstrating operation | movement of a light source unit, Comprising: The reflected light injects into the 6th division | segmentation light entrance surface 光源ユニットの動作を説明するためのものであって、反射光が第8分割光入射面に入射した状態を示す平面図The top view for demonstrating operation | movement of a light source unit, Comprising: The reflected light injects into the 8th division | segmentation light incident surface 光源ユニットの動作を説明するためのものであって、反射光が同期検知部に照射された状態を示す平面図The top view for demonstrating operation | movement of a light source unit, Comprising: The reflected light is irradiated to the synchronous detection part 光源ユニットの動作を説明するためのものであって、反射光が第4分割光入射面を走査する過程を示す拡大平面図An enlarged plan view for explaining an operation of the light source unit and showing a process in which the reflected light scans the fourth split light incident surface. 本発明の実施形態2に係るバックライト装置における導光部材の断面構成を示す断面図Sectional drawing which shows the cross-sectional structure of the light guide member in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. 光学部材を導光部材の光出射面に直接積層するよう構成を変更した場合を示す断面図Sectional drawing which shows the case where a structure is changed so that an optical member may be laminated | stacked directly on the light-projection surface of a light guide member 本発明の実施形態3に係るバックライト装置におけるシャーシと導光部材と光源ユニットとの配置構成を示す平面図The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit. 図15のxvi-xvi線断面図Xvi-xvi sectional view of FIG. 本発明の実施形態4に係るバックライト装置におけるシャーシと導光部材と光源ユニットとの配置構成を示す平面図The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit. 図17のxviii-xviii線断面図Xviii-xviii sectional view of FIG. 図17のxix-xix線断面図Xix-xix cross-sectional view of FIG. 本発明の実施形態5に係るバックライト装置におけるシャーシと導光部材と光源ユニットとの配置構成を示す平面図The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 5 of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit. 図20のxxi-xxi線断面図Xxi-xxi sectional view of FIG. 本発明の実施形態6に係るバックライト装置におけるシャーシと導光部材と光源ユニットとの配置構成を示す平面図The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 6 of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit. 本発明の実施形態7に係る光源ユニットの配置構成を示す平面図The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the light source unit which concerns on Embodiment 7 of this invention. 本発明の他の実施形態(1)に係るバックライト装置におけるシャーシと導光部材と光源ユニットとの配置構成を示す平面図The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the chassis in the backlight apparatus which concerns on other embodiment (1) of this invention, a light guide member, and a light source unit. 本発明の他の実施形態(2)に係る光源ユニットの配置構成を示す平面図The top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the light source unit which concerns on other embodiment (2) of this invention.
 <実施形態1>
 本発明の実施形態1を図1から図12によって説明する。本実施形態では、液晶表示装置10について例示する。なお、各図面の一部にはX軸、Y軸及びZ軸を示しており、各軸方向が各図面で示した方向となるように描かれている。また、図4及び図5に示す上側を表側とし、同図下側を裏側とする。
<Embodiment 1>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 10 is illustrated. In addition, a part of each drawing shows an X axis, a Y axis, and a Z axis, and each axis direction is drawn to be a direction shown in each drawing. Moreover, let the upper side shown in FIG.4 and FIG.5 be a front side, and let the lower side of the figure be a back side.
 本実施形態に係るテレビ受信装置TVは、図1に示すように、液晶表示装置10と、当該液晶表示装置10を挟むようにして収容する表裏両キャビネットCa,Cbと、電源Pと、チューナーTと、スタンドSとを備えて構成される。液晶表示装置(表示装置)10は、全体として横長(長手)の方形状をなし、縦置き状態で収容されている。この液晶表示装置10は、図2に示すように、表示パネルである液晶パネル11と、外部光源であるバックライト装置(照明装置)12とを備え、これらが枠状のベゼル13などにより一体的に保持されるようになっている。 As shown in FIG. 1, the television receiver TV according to the present embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 10, front and back cabinets Ca and Cb that are accommodated so as to sandwich the liquid crystal display device 10, a power source P, a tuner T, And a stand S. The liquid crystal display device (display device) 10 has a horizontally long (longitudinal) square shape as a whole and is accommodated in a vertically placed state. As shown in FIG. 2, the liquid crystal display device 10 includes a liquid crystal panel 11 that is a display panel and a backlight device (illumination device) 12 that is an external light source, which are integrated by a frame-like bezel 13 or the like. Is supposed to be retained.
 液晶パネル11は、図2に示すように、平面に視て横長(長手)の方形状をなしており、一対のガラス基板が所定のギャップを隔てた状態で貼り合わせられるとともに、両ガラス基板間に液晶が封入された構成とされる。一方のガラス基板には、互いに直交するソース配線とゲート配線とに接続されたスイッチング素子(例えばTFT)と、そのスイッチング素子に接続された画素電極、さらには配向膜等が設けられ、他方のガラス基板には、R(赤色),G(緑色),B(青色)等の各着色部が所定配列で配置されたカラーフィルタや対向電極、さらには配向膜等が設けられている。この液晶パネル11には、各ソース配線及び各ゲート配線に駆動信号を供給する液晶駆動用ドライバを介してコントロール基板(液晶駆動用ドライバ共々図示せず)が接続されており、このコントロール基板に備えられた液晶パネル制御部26によって駆動が制御されるようになっている(図6)。この液晶パネル制御部26により液晶パネル11には、1秒間に例えば60枚、120枚などの枚数の表示画像が表示されるようになっている。なお、両基板の外側には偏光板が配されている。 As shown in FIG. 2, the liquid crystal panel 11 has a horizontally long (longitudinal) rectangular shape in a plan view, and a pair of glass substrates are bonded together with a predetermined gap therebetween, and between the two glass substrates. The liquid crystal is sealed. One glass substrate is provided with a switching element (for example, TFT) connected to a source wiring and a gate wiring orthogonal to each other, a pixel electrode connected to the switching element, an alignment film, and the like. The substrate is provided with a color filter and counter electrodes in which colored portions such as R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are arranged in a predetermined arrangement, and an alignment film. The liquid crystal panel 11 is connected to a control board (not shown) with a liquid crystal driving driver for supplying a driving signal to each source wiring and each gate wiring. The driving is controlled by the liquid crystal panel control unit 26 (FIG. 6). The liquid crystal panel control unit 26 displays, for example, 60 or 120 display images per second on the liquid crystal panel 11. A polarizing plate is disposed on the outside of both substrates.
 バックライト装置12は、図2に示すように、光出射面側(液晶パネル11側)に向けて開口する開口部を有した略箱型をなすシャーシ14と、シャーシ14の開口部を覆うようにして配される光学部材15群(拡散板(光拡散部材)15aと、拡散板15aと液晶パネル11との間に配される複数の光学シート15b)とを備える。さらに、シャーシ14内には、後に詳しく説明する光源ユニットUと、光源ユニットUからの光を導光して光学部材15(液晶パネル11)へと導く導光部材19と、光学部材15及び液晶パネル11を裏側から受けるフレーム16とが備えられる。そして、このバックライト装置12は、導光部材19における長辺側の一端部に対して光源ユニットUが対向状に配されてなる、いわゆるエッジライト型(サイドライト型)とされている。以下では、バックライト装置12の各構成部品について詳しく説明する。 As shown in FIG. 2, the backlight device 12 covers a substantially box-shaped chassis 14 having an opening that opens toward the light emission surface side (the liquid crystal panel 11 side), and covers the opening of the chassis 14. The optical member 15 group (diffusing plate (light diffusing member) 15a and a plurality of optical sheets 15b arranged between the diffusing plate 15a and the liquid crystal panel 11) is provided. Further, in the chassis 14, a light source unit U, which will be described in detail later, a light guide member 19 that guides light from the light source unit U and guides it to the optical member 15 (liquid crystal panel 11), the optical member 15, and the liquid crystal. A frame 16 that receives the panel 11 from the back side is provided. The backlight device 12 is of a so-called edge light type (side light type) in which the light source unit U is arranged opposite to one end of the light guide member 19 on the long side. Below, each component of the backlight apparatus 12 is demonstrated in detail.
 シャーシ14は、金属板材(鉄、アルミニウムなどを材料とした板金)からなり、図2及び図3に示すように、液晶パネル11と同様に横長の方形状をなす底板14aと、底板14aにおける長辺側の各外端から立ち上がる一対の長辺側の側板14bと、底板14aにおける短辺側の各外端から立ち上がる一対の短辺側の側板14cとから構成されている。シャーシ14(底板14a)は、その長辺方向がX軸方向(水平方向)と一致し、短辺方向がY軸方向(鉛直方向)と一致している。また、長辺側の側板14bには、フレーム16及びベゼル13がねじ止め可能とされる。 The chassis 14 is made of a metal plate material (sheet metal made of iron, aluminum, or the like). As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the chassis 14 has a horizontally long bottom plate 14a and a length of the bottom plate 14a. It is comprised from a pair of side plate 14b of the long side which stands | starts up from each outer end of a side, and a pair of side plate 14c of the short side which stands up from each outer end of the short side in the baseplate 14a. The long side direction of the chassis 14 (bottom plate 14a) coincides with the X-axis direction (horizontal direction), and the short side direction coincides with the Y-axis direction (vertical direction). The frame 16 and the bezel 13 can be screwed to the long side plate 14b.
 光学部材15は、図2に示すように、液晶パネル11及びシャーシ14と同様に平面に視て横長の方形状をなしている。光学部材15は、フレーム16の表側(光出射側)に載せられることで、液晶パネル11と導光部材19との間に介在して配される。光学部材15は、裏側(導光部材19側、光出射側とは反対側)に配される拡散板15aと、表側(液晶パネル11側、光出射側)に配される光学シート15bとから構成される。拡散板15aは、所定の厚みを持つほぼ透明な樹脂製で板状をなす基材内に拡散粒子を多数分散して設けた構成とされ、透過する光を拡散させる機能を有する。光学シート15bは、拡散板15aと比べると板厚が薄いシート状をなしており、3枚が積層して配されている。具体的な光学シート15bの種類としては、例えば拡散シート、レンズシート、反射型偏光シートなどがあり、これらの中から適宜に選択して使用することが可能である。 As shown in FIG. 2, the optical member 15 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed in a plane, like the liquid crystal panel 11 and the chassis 14. The optical member 15 is placed between the liquid crystal panel 11 and the light guide member 19 by being placed on the front side (light emitting side) of the frame 16. The optical member 15 includes a diffusion plate 15a disposed on the back side (light guide member 19 side, opposite to the light emitting side) and an optical sheet 15b disposed on the front side (liquid crystal panel 11 side, light emitting side). Composed. The diffusing plate 15a has a structure in which a large number of diffusing particles are dispersed in a substantially transparent resin-made base material having a predetermined thickness, and has a function of diffusing transmitted light. The optical sheet 15b has a sheet shape that is thinner than the diffusion plate 15a, and three optical sheets are laminated. Specific types of the optical sheet 15b include, for example, a diffusion sheet, a lens sheet, a reflective polarizing sheet, and the like, which can be appropriately selected and used.
 フレーム16は、図4及び図5に示すように、シャーシ14の外周端部に沿って延在する枠状(額縁状)に形成されており、シャーシ14の各側板14b,14cに対して外嵌可能とされる。フレーム16は、階段状をなす受け面を2段有しており、図4及び図5に示す下段側の受け面により光学部材15を、上段側の受け面により液晶パネル11をそれぞれ裏側から受けることができるものとされる。このフレーム16の枠状部分における一対の長辺側部分のうち、光源ユニットU側(図4に示す左側)の長辺側部分は、図4に示すように、もう片方の長辺側部分よりも幅広に形成されている。なお、ベゼル13に関しても、光源ユニットU側の長辺側部分が、上記したフレーム16と同様に幅広形状とされている(図2及び図4)。 As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the frame 16 is formed in a frame shape (frame shape) extending along the outer peripheral end of the chassis 14, and is external to the side plates 14 b and 14 c of the chassis 14. It can be fitted. The frame 16 has two stepped receiving surfaces. The optical member 15 is received from the lower receiving surface shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, and the liquid crystal panel 11 is received from the rear side from the upper receiving surface. It is supposed to be possible. Of the pair of long side portions of the frame-like portion of the frame 16, the long side portion on the light source unit U side (left side shown in FIG. 4) is more than the other long side portion as shown in FIG. Is also formed wide. As for the bezel 13, the long side portion on the light source unit U side has a wide shape like the above-described frame 16 (FIGS. 2 and 4).
 続いて、先に導光部材19について説明した後、光源ユニットUについて説明する。導光部材19は、屈折率が空気よりも十分に高く且つほぼ透明な(透光性に優れた)合成樹脂材料(例えばアクリルなど)からなる。本実施形態に係る導光部材19は、図2及び図3に示すように、全体として液晶パネル11やシャーシ14と同様に平面に視て横長の方形状をなす板状とされており、全体の長辺方向がX軸方向と、全体の短辺方向がY軸方向と、主板面と直交する板厚方向がZ軸方向とそれぞれ一致している。導光部材19は、図4に示すように、シャーシ14内において液晶パネル11及び光学部材15の直下位置に複数(4枚)が積層して配されており、その導光部材19群における一端部(図3に示す下側端部)に対して光源ユニットUが対向状に配されている。従って、光源ユニットUと導光部材19との並び方向がY軸方向と一致するのに対して、光学部材15(液晶パネル11)と導光部材19との並び方向がZ軸方向と一致しており、両並び方向が互いに直交するものとされる。そして、導光部材19は、光源ユニットUが有するLED17からの光を導入するとともに、その光を内部で伝播させつつ光学部材15側(Z軸方向)へ向くよう立ち上げて出射させる機能を有する。本実施形態に係るバックライト装置12では、大きさなどが異なる4種類の導光部材19を積層して用いるようにしており、以下では先に各導光部材19の共通構造について説明した後、各導光部材19の相違構造を説明するものとする。 Subsequently, after describing the light guide member 19 first, the light source unit U will be described. The light guide member 19 is made of a synthetic resin material (for example, acrylic) having a refractive index sufficiently higher than that of air and substantially transparent (exceeding translucency). As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the light guide member 19 according to the present embodiment is formed in a plate shape that has a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view as with the liquid crystal panel 11 and the chassis 14 as a whole. The long-side direction is the X-axis direction, the entire short-side direction is the Y-axis direction, and the thickness direction perpendicular to the main plate surface is the Z-axis direction. As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of (four) light guide members 19 are arranged in a position immediately below the liquid crystal panel 11 and the optical member 15 in the chassis 14, and one end of the light guide member 19 group. The light source unit U is arranged to face the portion (lower end portion shown in FIG. 3). Accordingly, the alignment direction of the light source unit U and the light guide member 19 matches the Y-axis direction, while the alignment direction of the optical member 15 (liquid crystal panel 11) and the light guide member 19 matches the Z-axis direction. Both the alignment directions are orthogonal to each other. The light guide member 19 introduces light from the LED 17 included in the light source unit U, and has a function of rising and emitting the light toward the optical member 15 side (Z-axis direction) while propagating the light inside. . In the backlight device 12 according to the present embodiment, four types of light guide members 19 having different sizes and the like are stacked and used. Hereinafter, the common structure of each light guide member 19 will be described first, A different structure of each light guide member 19 will be described.
 まず、導光部材19の共通構造について説明する。導光部材19は、図3及び図4に示すように、全体としてシャーシ14の底板14a及び光学部材15の各板面に沿って延在する略平板状をなしており、その主板面がX軸方向及びY軸方向に並行するものとされる。導光部材19の主板面のうち、表側(光出射側)を向く面であって光学部材15と対向する部分、つまり光学部材15側に露出した部分が、内部の光を光学部材15(液晶パネル11)に向けて出射させる光出射面19aとされる。導光部材19における主板面に対して隣接する外周端面のうち、長辺側で且つ光源ユニットUと対向する図3に示す下側(図4に示す左側)の端面、つまり導光部材19における光源ユニットU側の端部が有する端面が、光源ユニットUからの光が入射される光入射面19bとなっている。光入射面19bは、全体として長辺方向がX軸方向と、短辺方向がZ軸方向とそれぞれ一致する長手状の面とされており、光出射面19aに対して略直交する面とされる。 First, the common structure of the light guide member 19 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the light guide member 19 has a substantially flat plate shape that extends along the bottom plate 14 a of the chassis 14 and the plate surfaces of the optical member 15 as a whole. It is assumed to be parallel to the axial direction and the Y-axis direction. Of the main plate surface of the light guide member 19, the surface facing the front side (light emitting side) and facing the optical member 15, that is, the portion exposed to the optical member 15 side, transmits the internal light to the optical member 15 (liquid crystal The light emission surface 19a is emitted toward the panel 11). Of the outer peripheral end surfaces adjacent to the main plate surface in the light guide member 19, the lower side (left side in FIG. 4) end surface shown in FIG. 3 facing the light source unit U on the long side, that is, in the light guide member 19. An end surface of the end portion on the light source unit U side is a light incident surface 19b on which light from the light source unit U is incident. The light incident surface 19b as a whole is a long surface in which the long side direction coincides with the X-axis direction and the short side direction coincides with the Z-axis direction, and is a surface substantially orthogonal to the light emitting surface 19a. The
 図4に示すように、導光部材19における主板面のうち、光出射面19aとは反対側(裏側)の面が底面19cとされており、この底面19cに沿って反射シート20が配されている。反射シート20は、表面が光の反射性に優れた白色を呈する合成樹脂製とされており、導光部材19における底面19cを全域にわたって覆うとともに、導光部材19のうち光入射面19bとは反対側の面19dをも覆うよう、LED17側とは反対側の端部が屈曲されている。導光部材19は、全域にわたってほぼ一定の板厚寸法(Z軸方向についての寸法)を有するものとされており、従って上記した光出射面19aと底面19cとが互いに交わることなく並行するものとされる。 As shown in FIG. 4, of the main plate surface of the light guide member 19, the surface opposite to the light exit surface 19 a (back side) is a bottom surface 19 c, and the reflection sheet 20 is arranged along the bottom surface 19 c. ing. The reflection sheet 20 is made of a synthetic resin having a white surface with excellent light reflectivity, covers the entire bottom surface 19 c of the light guide member 19, and is the light incident surface 19 b of the light guide member 19. The end opposite to the LED 17 side is bent so as to cover the surface 19d on the opposite side. The light guide member 19 has a substantially constant plate thickness dimension (dimension in the Z-axis direction) over the entire region, and therefore, the light emitting surface 19a and the bottom surface 19c described above are parallel to each other without crossing each other. Is done.
 各導光部材19における光出射面19aと、底面19cのうち光出射面19aと平面に視て重畳する部分との少なくともいずれか一方には、内部の光を反射させる反射部(図示せず)または内部の光を散乱させる散乱部(図示せず)が所定の面内分布を持つようパターニングされている。導光部材19内を伝播する光が反射部にて反射されたり、散乱部にて散乱されることで、光出射面19aから外部へと出射するのが促されるものとされる。この反射部または散乱部の上記面内分布は、例えば光源ユニットUに近い側ほど分布密度が低く、光源ユニットUから遠い側ほど分布密度が高いものとされる。これにより、光出射面19aからの出射光が面内において均一な分布となるよう制御される。 At least one of the light exit surface 19a of each light guide member 19 and the portion of the bottom surface 19c that overlaps the light exit surface 19a in plan view, a reflecting portion (not shown) that reflects internal light. Alternatively, a scattering portion (not shown) that scatters internal light is patterned to have a predetermined in-plane distribution. The light propagating through the light guide member 19 is reflected by the reflecting portion or scattered by the scattering portion, and is thus urged to be emitted from the light emitting surface 19a to the outside. For example, the in-plane distribution of the reflection part or the scattering part has a lower distribution density toward the side closer to the light source unit U and a higher distribution density toward the side farther from the light source unit U. Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting surface 19a is controlled to have a uniform distribution in the surface.
 上記した共通構造を有する導光部材19は、本実施形態におけるバックライト装置12では、図4に示すように、平面に視た大きさなどが異なる4種類のものが互いにZ軸方向(板厚方向)について積層された形で用いられている。さらには、積層される4種類の導光部材19は、図3及び図5に示すように、X軸方向(幅方向)についてそれぞれ8つに分割されており、それに伴って光入射面19a及び光出射面19bなどについても8つに分割されている。以下、積層される4種類の導光部材19の相違構造及び導光部材19の分割構造について順次に詳しく説明する。 As shown in FIG. 4, the light guide member 19 having the above-described common structure is different from the backlight device 12 according to the present embodiment in four types having different sizes in a plan view as shown in FIG. Direction) is used in a stacked form. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the four types of light guide members 19 to be stacked are each divided into eight in the X-axis direction (width direction), and accordingly, the light incident surface 19a and The light exit surface 19b and the like are also divided into eight. Hereinafter, the different structures of the four types of light guide members 19 to be stacked and the divided structure of the light guide members 19 will be described in detail in order.
 先に、積層される4種類の導光部材19の相違構造について詳しく説明する。なお、以下では積層された導光部材19を区別する場合には、最も表側に配されるものを「第1導光部材」として符号に添え字Aを、表側から2番目に配されるものを「第2導光部材」として符号に添え字Bを、表側から3番目に配されるものを「第3導光部材」として符号に添え字Cを、表側から4番目(最も裏側)に配されるものを「第4導光部材」として符号に添え字Dを付し、区別せずに総称する場合には、符号に添え字を付さないものとする。また、上記した添え字A~Dは、各導光部材19の関連部位(具体的には、光出射面19a、光入射面19b、底面19cなど)を区別する場合にも付すものとする。 First, the different structures of the four types of light guide members 19 to be stacked will be described in detail. In the following description, when distinguishing the laminated light guide members 19, the one arranged most on the front side is referred to as a “first light guide member”, and the subscript A is arranged on the reference symbol second and from the front side. Is the second light guide member, and the subscript B is the third from the front side. The third light guide member is the third light guide member, and the subscript C is the fourth from the front side (most back). In the case where what is arranged is a “fourth light guide member” and a subscript D is added to the code and is generically referred to without distinction, the subscript is not added to the code. Further, the subscripts A to D described above are also attached when distinguishing the related portions (specifically, the light emitting surface 19a, the light incident surface 19b, the bottom surface 19c, etc.) of each light guide member 19.
 4種類の導光部材19A~19Dは、図3から図5に示すように、全体の長辺方向(X軸方向)についての寸法、つまり長辺寸法については全て同一とされるものの、全体の短辺方向(Y軸方向)についての寸法、つまり短辺寸法については、表側(光出射側)のものほど段階的に逐次小さくなり、裏側(光出射側とは反対側)のものほど段階的に逐次大きくなる傾向とされる。詳しくは、第1導光部材19Aよりも裏側に配される第2導光部材19B、第3導光部材19C及び第4導光部材19Dは、それぞれの短辺寸法及び主板面(底面19cB~19cD)の面積が第1導光部材19Aの短辺寸法及び主板面(底面19cA)の面積のそれぞれ整数倍程度とされる。より具体的には、第2導光部材19Bは、第1導光部材19Aのすぐ裏側に積層されるとともに、その短辺寸法及び主板面(底面19cB)の面積が、第1導光部材19Aの約2倍程度の大きさとされている。第3導光部材19Cは、第2導光部材19Bのすぐ裏側に積層されるとともにその短辺寸法及び主板面(底面19cC)の面積が、第2導光部材19Bの約1.5倍程度であり、第1導光部材19Aの約3倍程度の大きさとされている。第4導光部材19Dは、第3導光部材19Cのすぐ裏側に積層されるとともにその短辺寸法及び主板面(底面19cD)の面積が、第3導光部材19Bの約1.3倍程度であり、第2導光部材19Bの約2倍程度であり、さらには第1導光部材19Aの約4倍程度の大きさとされている。このように、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dにおける短辺寸法及び主板面(底面19cB~19cD)の面積と、そのすぐ表側に積層される第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cにおける短辺寸法及び主板面(底面19cA~19cC)の面積との差は、それぞれほぼ同じとされ、その大きさは第1導光部材19Aの短辺寸法及び主板面(底面19cA)の面積と一致している。 As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the four types of light guide members 19A to 19D have the same overall length in the long side direction (X-axis direction), that is, the long side dimensions are the same. Regarding the dimension in the short side direction (Y-axis direction), that is, the short side dimension, the front side (light emission side) gradually decreases stepwise, and the back side (opposite side to the light emission side) gradually decreases. It is said that it tends to increase gradually. Specifically, the second light guide member 19B, the third light guide member 19C, and the fourth light guide member 19D disposed on the back side of the first light guide member 19A have the short side dimensions and the main plate surfaces (the bottom surfaces 19cB to 19cB). 19cD) is an integer multiple of the short side dimension of the first light guide member 19A and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cA). More specifically, the second light guide member 19B is laminated immediately behind the first light guide member 19A, and the short side dimension and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cB) are the first light guide member 19A. It is about twice as large. The third light guide member 19C is laminated immediately behind the second light guide member 19B, and the short side dimension and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cC) are about 1.5 times that of the second light guide member 19B. And about 3 times the size of the first light guide member 19A. The fourth light guide member 19D is laminated immediately behind the third light guide member 19C, and the short side dimension and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cD) are about 1.3 times that of the third light guide member 19B. And about twice as large as the second light guide member 19B, and about four times as large as the first light guide member 19A. Thus, the short side dimensions and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surfaces 19cB to 19cD) in the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D, and the first light guide members 19A to 3A stacked immediately on the front side thereof. The difference between the short side dimension of the light guide member 19C and the area of the main plate surface (bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC) is substantially the same, and the size thereof is the short side dimension of the first light guide member 19A and the main plate surface (bottom surface 19cA). ).
 互いに積層される4種類の導光部材19A~19Dのうち、最も表側に配される第1導光部材19Aについては、表側を向いた主板面の全域が光学部材15側に露出する光出射面19aAとされるのに対し、第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cの裏側に積層される第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dについては、表側を向いた主板面の一部が表側に積層される第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cを支持する支持面19eとされ、支持面19eを除いた部分が光学部材15側に露出する光出射面19aB~19aDとされる。支持面19eは、Y軸方向について隣り合う光出射面19aと共に連続した平面を構成している。なお、以下では第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dが有する支持面19eについて区別する場合には、対応する添え字B~Dをそれぞれ付すものとし、区別せずに総称する場合には、添え字を付さないものとする。 Of the four types of light guide members 19A to 19D stacked on each other, for the first light guide member 19A arranged on the front side, the light emitting surface where the entire area of the main plate surface facing the front side is exposed to the optical member 15 side. 19aA, the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D stacked on the back side of the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C are arranged on the main plate surface facing the front side. The first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C, which are partially laminated on the front side, are used as support surfaces 19e that support the light guide surfaces 19eB. 19aD. The support surface 19e forms a continuous plane together with the light emitting surface 19a adjacent in the Y-axis direction. In the following description, when the support surfaces 19e of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are distinguished, the corresponding subscripts B to D are respectively attached, and are collectively referred to without distinction. Shall not be subscripted.
 互いに積層される4種類の導光部材19A~19Dは、各光入射面19bが全て面一状に揃えられるとともに、全体の短辺方向に沿った両側端面についてもそれぞれ全て面一状に揃えられている。つまり、互いに短辺寸法が異なる各導光部材19A~19Dは、光源ユニットU側に片寄って配されていることになる。従って、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dにおける表側を向いた主板面のうち、光源ユニットU側とは反対側の所定領域が表側に第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cが積層されない光出射面19aB~19aDとされるのに対し、光源ユニットU側の所定領域が表側に第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cが積層される支持面19eB~19eDとされる。このように、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dが有する各光出射面19aB~19aDと、光源ユニットUとの間には、支持面19eB~19eDが介在する配置とされている。つまり、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dは、支持面19eB~19eDを光源ユニットUとの間で挟む形で光出射面19aB~19aDを有していることになる。言い換えると、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dが有する各光出射面19aB~19aDは、互いに面一状をなす各光入射面19bB~19bDから視た奥行き方向(図3に示す上方、図4に示す右方)について順次隣り合う形で配されている。第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dにおいては、全体の短辺方向(Y軸方向)と、支持面19eB~19eDと光出射面19aB~19aDとの並び方向とが一致しており、支持面19eB~19eDから光出射面19aB~19aDへ向かう方向(図3に示す上方、図4に示す右方)が光源ユニットU(光入射面19bB~19bD)から遠ざかる方向と一致し、光出射面19aB~19aDから支持面19eB~19eDへ向かう方向(図3に示す下方、図4に示す左方)が光源ユニットU(光入射面19bB~19bD)に近づく方向と一致している。 In the four types of light guide members 19A to 19D stacked on each other, the light incident surfaces 19b are all flush with each other, and both end faces along the entire short side direction are all flush with each other. ing. That is, the light guide members 19A to 19D having different short side dimensions are arranged to be offset toward the light source unit U side. Accordingly, among the main plate surfaces facing the front side in the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D, the predetermined region on the side opposite to the light source unit U side is on the front side, and the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide is on the front side. The light emitting surfaces 19aB to 19aD on which the member 19C is not stacked are provided, whereas the predetermined regions on the light source unit U side are the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD on which the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C are stacked on the front side. It is said. As described above, the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD are arranged between the light emitting surfaces 19aB to 19aD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D and the light source unit U. . That is, the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D have the light emission surfaces 19aB to 19aD in such a manner that the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD are sandwiched between the light source unit U. In other words, the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are in the depth direction as seen from the light incident surfaces 19bB to 19bD that are flush with each other (shown in FIG. 3). The upper side and the right side in FIG. In the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D, the entire short side direction (Y-axis direction) and the alignment direction of the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD and the light emission surfaces 19aB to 19aD are the same. The direction from the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD toward the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD (upward in FIG. 3, right in FIG. 4) coincides with the direction away from the light source unit U (light incident surfaces 19bB to 19bD). The direction from the emission surfaces 19aB to 19aD toward the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD (the lower side in FIG. 3 and the left side in FIG. 4) coincides with the direction approaching the light source unit U (light incident surfaces 19bB to 19bD).
 そして、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dが有する支持面19eB~19eDは、支持対象となる表側に積層された第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cにおける底面19cA~19cCと同じ面積を有するものとされる。言い換えると、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dが有する光出射面19aB~19aDは、表側を向いた主板面の面積から支持対象となる表側に積層された第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cにおける底面19cA~19cCの面積を差し引いた大きさの面積を有している。具体的には、第2導光部材19Bは、表側を向いた主板面のうち、光源ユニットUとは反対側の約半分の領域が光出射面19aBとされるのに対し、光源ユニットU側の約半分の領域が第1導光部材19Aを支持する支持面19eBとされる。第3導光部材19Cは、表側を向いた主板面のうち、光源ユニットUとは反対側の約1/3の領域が光出射面19aCとされるのに対し、光源ユニットU側の約2/3の領域が第2導光部材19Bを支持する支持面19eCとされる。第4導光部材19Dは、表側を向いた主板面のうち、光源ユニットUとは反対側の約1/4の領域が光出射面19aDとされるのに対し、光源ユニットU側の約3/4の領域が第3導光部材19Cを支持する支持面19eDとされる。なお、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dにおける主板面をなす底面19cB~19cDの面積は、それぞれ光出射面19aB~19aDの面積と、支持面19eB~19eDの面積とを足し合わせた大きさと等しいものとされる。 The support surfaces 19eB to 19eD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cA to 19C of the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C stacked on the front side to be supported. It has the same area as 19cC. In other words, the light output surfaces 19aB to 19aD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D have the first light guide member 19A stacked on the front side to be supported from the area of the main plate surface facing the front side. The area of the third light guide member 19C is obtained by subtracting the area of the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC. Specifically, in the second light guide member 19B, about half of the main plate surface facing the front side opposite to the light source unit U is the light emitting surface 19aB, whereas the second light guide member 19B is on the light source unit U side. The half of the area is a support surface 19eB that supports the first light guide member 19A. In the third light guide member 19C, about 1/3 of the main plate surface facing the front side opposite to the light source unit U is the light emitting surface 19aC, while the second light guide member 19C has about 2 on the light source unit U side. The region of / 3 is a support surface 19eC that supports the second light guide member 19B. The fourth light guide member 19D has a light emitting surface 19aD in which about 1/4 of the main plate surface facing the front side opposite to the light source unit U is the light emitting surface 19aD. The region of / 4 is a support surface 19eD that supports the third light guide member 19C. The areas of the bottom surfaces 19cB to 19cD forming the main plate surfaces of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are the sum of the areas of the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD and the areas of the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD, respectively. It is assumed to be equal to the size.
 上記した第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dが有する各支持面19eB~19eDは、図4に示すように、表側に積層された第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cの各底面19cA~19cCに沿って配された各反射シート20によってほぼ全域にわたって覆われている。これにより、相対的に裏側に配された(図4及び図5に示す下段側に配された)第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19D内を伝播する光が光出射面19aB~19aDに到達する前の段階で、表側に積層された(図4及び図5に示す上段側に配された)第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19C内に入るのを防ぐことができる。もって互いに積層される各導光部材19A~19D間の光学的独立性を担保することができる。なお、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dは、支持面19eB~19eDを有する部分が光源ユニットUからの光を光出射面19aB~19aDに向けて導光する導光部をなしており、光出射面19aB~19aDを有する部分が光を出射させる出光部をなしている、と言える。 As shown in FIG. 4, the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D are stacked on the front side, as shown in FIG. Are substantially entirely covered by the reflection sheets 20 arranged along the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC. Thereby, the light propagating through the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D, which is relatively arranged on the back side (arranged on the lower stage side shown in FIGS. 4 and 5), is emitted from the light emitting surface 19aB. Preventing entry into the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C stacked on the front side (arranged on the upper side shown in FIGS. 4 and 5) before reaching 19aD it can. Therefore, optical independence between the light guide members 19A to 19D stacked on each other can be ensured. The second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D form a light guide unit in which the portion having the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD guides the light from the light source unit U toward the light emission surfaces 19aB to 19aD. In other words, it can be said that the portion having the light emitting surfaces 19aB to 19aD forms a light emitting portion that emits light.
 上記のような構成の第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dの各支持面19eB~19eDに第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cを積層した状態を平面に視ると、図3に示すように、同図下側から光源ユニットU、第1導光部材19Aの光出射面19aA、第2導光部材19Bの光出射面19aB、第3導光部材19Cの光出射面19aC、第4導光部材19Dの光出射面19aDの順でY軸方向に沿って並ぶものとされる。最も表側に配された第1導光部材19Aの光出射面19aAが最も光源ユニットUに近く、最も裏側に配された第4導光部材19Dの光出射面19aDが最も光源ユニットUから遠くなる配置とされている。つまり、相対的に表側に配された導光部材19A~19Cの光出射面19aA~19aCほど光源ユニットUに相対的に近く、相対的に裏側に配された導光部材19B~19Dの光出射面19aB~19aDほど光源ユニットUから相対的に遠い配置とされている。各導光部材19A~19Dを積層した状態をY軸方向に沿った断面で視ると、図4に示すように、各光出射面19aA~19aDが階段状をなしており、各光出射面19aA~19aD間の段差が各導光部材19の板厚寸法とほぼ等しいものとされる。なお、相対的に表側に配された導光部材19A~19Cの光出射面19aA~19aCほど光学部材15に相対的に近く、相対的に裏側に配された導光部材19B~19Dの光出射面19aB~19aDほど光学部材15から相対的に遠くなる配置とされる。 When the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C are stacked on the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD of the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D having the above-described configuration when viewed in plan. As shown in FIG. 3, the light source unit U, the light output surface 19aA of the first light guide member 19A, the light output surface 19aB of the second light guide member 19B, and the light output of the third light guide member 19C from the lower side of FIG. The surface 19aC and the light exit surface 19aD of the fourth light guide member 19D are arranged in this order along the Y-axis direction. The light emission surface 19aA of the first light guide member 19A arranged on the front side is closest to the light source unit U, and the light emission surface 19aD of the fourth light guide member 19D arranged on the back side is farthest from the light source unit U. It is supposed to be arranged. In other words, the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aC of the light guide members 19A to 19C relatively disposed on the front side are relatively closer to the light source unit U, and the light output of the light guide members 19B to 19D relatively disposed on the back side. The surfaces 19aB to 19aD are arranged relatively far from the light source unit U. When the state in which the light guide members 19A to 19D are stacked is viewed in a cross section along the Y-axis direction, as shown in FIG. 4, each of the light emission surfaces 19aA to 19aD has a stepped shape. The level difference between 19aA to 19aD is approximately equal to the thickness of each light guide member 19. The light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aC of the light guide members 19A to 19C relatively arranged on the front side are relatively closer to the optical member 15 and the light emission of the light guide members 19B to 19D relatively arranged on the back side. The surfaces 19aB to 19aD are disposed relatively far from the optical member 15.
 続いて、導光部材19の分割構造について詳しく説明する。なお、以下では導光部材19の分割されたものを「分割導光部材」とするとともに、光入射面19a及び光出射面19bの分割されたものを「分割光入射面」及び「分割光出射面」とし、それぞれの符号に添え字「S」を付すものとする。各分割導光部材19Sは、図3及び図5に示すように、導光部材19をその短辺方向(Y軸方向)に沿って分断するような形で、長辺方向(X軸方向)について8つに分割してなり、その分割幅(後述する走査方向に沿った寸法)はほぼ等しいものとされる。各分割導光部材19Sは、その長辺寸法が導光部材19における全体の短辺寸法と一致しているのに対し、短辺寸法(後述する走査方向に沿った寸法)が導光部材19における全体の長辺寸法の約1/8程度とされる。隣り合う分割導光部材19S間には、僅かながらも隙間が保有されており、そこが各分割導光部材19Sよりも相対的に屈折率が低い空気層(低屈折率層)ASとされる。この空気層ASにより、隣り合う分割導光部材19S間で内部を伝播する光が漏れ出すのが防がれ、もって隣り合う分割導光部材19S間の光学的独立性を担保することができる。光出射面19a及び光入射面19bは、X軸方向について各分割導光部材19S毎に複数の領域に区分されており、その区分された各領域が分割光出射面19aS及び分割光入射面19bSとされる。言い換えると、各分割導光部材19Sは、それぞれが分割光出射面19aS及び分割光入射面19bSを個別に有しており、X軸方向について隣り合う各分割光出射面19aSが面一状に並べられることでその導光部材19の全体の光出射面19aが構成されるとともに、X軸方向について隣り合う各分割光入射面19bSが面一状に並べられることで、その導光部材19の全体の光入射面19bが構成されている。各分割光出射面19aSは、互いにほぼ同じ面積を有するものとされる。同様に各分割光入射面19bSは、互いにほぼ同じ面積を有するものとされる。 Subsequently, the divided structure of the light guide member 19 will be described in detail. Hereinafter, the divided light guide member 19 is referred to as a “divided light guide member”, and the divided light incident surface 19 a and the light output surface 19 b are referred to as “divided light incident surface” and “divided light output”. It is assumed that a suffix “S” is added to each symbol. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, each divided light guide member 19 </ b> S has a shape in which the light guide member 19 is divided along the short side direction (Y-axis direction) and the long side direction (X-axis direction). The divided width (dimension along the scanning direction to be described later) is substantially equal. Each divided light guide member 19 </ b> S has a long side dimension that coincides with an overall short side dimension of the light guide member 19, whereas a short side dimension (a dimension along a scanning direction described later) has a light guide member 19. About 1/8 of the entire long side dimension. There is a slight gap between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S, and this is an air layer (low refractive index layer) AS having a relatively lower refractive index than each divided light guide member 19S. . This air layer AS prevents the light propagating through the interior between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S from leaking, thereby ensuring optical independence between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S. The light emitting surface 19a and the light incident surface 19b are divided into a plurality of regions for each divided light guide member 19S in the X-axis direction, and the divided regions are divided light emitting surfaces 19aS and divided light incident surfaces 19bS. It is said. In other words, each divided light guide member 19S has a divided light emitting surface 19aS and a divided light incident surface 19bS individually, and each divided light emitting surface 19aS adjacent in the X-axis direction is arranged in a flush manner. As a result, the entire light emitting surface 19a of the light guide member 19 is configured, and the divided light incident surfaces 19bS adjacent to each other in the X-axis direction are arranged in a flush manner, so that the entire light guide member 19 is arranged. The light incident surface 19b is configured. The divided light exit surfaces 19aS have substantially the same area. Similarly, the divided light incident surfaces 19bS have substantially the same area.
 なお、以下では、各分割導光部材19S、各分割光出射面19aS及び各分割光入射面19bSについて区別する場合は、図3に示す左端のもの(最もLED17に近いもの)を「第1」として各符号に添え字「A」を付し、そこから同図右側のものを順に「第2」、「第3」・・・として、各符号に添え字「B」、「C」・・・をそれぞれ付し、そして同図右端のもの(最もLED17から遠いもの)を「第8」として各符号に添え字「H」を付すものとする。具体的には、第1分割導光部材19SA~第8分割導光部材19SHは、それぞれ第1分割光入射面19aSA~第8分割光入射面19aSH、及び第1分割光出射面19bSA~第8分割光出射面19bSHをそれぞれ有していることになる。なお、各分割導光部材19S、各分割光出射面19aS及び各分割光入射面19bSを区別せずに総称する場合には、各符号に添え字を付さないものとする。 In the following, when distinguishing each divided light guide member 19S, each divided light emitting surface 19aS, and each divided light incident surface 19bS, the one at the left end shown in FIG. 3 (the one closest to the LED 17) is “first”. The subscript “A” is attached to each symbol, and the right side of the symbol is designated as “second”, “third”..., And the subscript “B”, “C”,. Each of the symbols is attached with a suffix “H” as “eighth” with the one at the right end of the figure (the one farthest from the LED 17). Specifically, the first divided light guide member 19SA to the eighth divided light guide member 19SH respectively include the first divided light incident surface 19aSA to the eighth divided light incident surface 19aSH and the first divided light output surface 19bSA to the eighth. Each has a divided light exit surface 19bSH. In addition, when each division | segmentation light guide member 19S, each division | segmentation light emission surface 19aS, and each division | segmentation light entrance surface 19bS are named generically without distinguishing, a subscript shall not be attached | subjected to each code | symbol.
 続いて、光源ユニットUについて詳しく説明する。光源ユニットUは、図2及び図3に示すように、光源であるLED(Light Emitting Diode:発光ダイオード)17と、LED17が実装されたLED基板18と、LED17からの光を集光しつつ出射させる集光レンズ21と、集光レンズ21からの光を導光部材19に向けて反射させるポリゴンミラー22と、ポリゴンミラー22の回転状態にLED17の発光状態を同期させるための同期検知部23とから構成されている。 Subsequently, the light source unit U will be described in detail. 2 and 3, the light source unit U emits an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 17 as a light source, an LED substrate 18 on which the LED 17 is mounted, and the light from the LED 17 while condensing the light. A condenser lens 21 to be reflected, a polygon mirror 22 that reflects light from the condenser lens 21 toward the light guide member 19, and a synchronization detection unit 23 that synchronizes the light emission state of the LED 17 with the rotation state of the polygon mirror 22. It is composed of
 LED17は、図3に示すように、LED基板18に固着される基板部上にLEDチップを樹脂材により封止した構成とされる。基板部に実装されるLEDチップは、主発光波長が1種類とされ、具体的には、青色を単色発光するものが用いられている。その一方、LEDチップを封止する樹脂材には、LEDチップから発せられた青色の光により励起されて所定の色を発光する蛍光体が分散配合されており、全体として概ね白色光を発するものとされる。なお、蛍光体としては、例えば黄色光を発光する黄色蛍光体、緑色光を発光する緑色蛍光体、及び赤色光を発光する赤色蛍光体の中から適宜組み合わせて用いたり、またはいずれか1つを単独で用いることができる。このLED17は、LED基板18に対する実装面とは反対側の面が発光面となる、いわゆるトップ型とされている。LED17は、その発光光の光軸、つまり発光強度が最も高い光の進行方向がX軸方向と一致するような配光分布を有している。 The LED 17 has a configuration in which an LED chip is sealed with a resin material on a substrate portion fixed to the LED substrate 18 as shown in FIG. The LED chip mounted on the substrate unit has one main emission wavelength, and specifically, one that emits blue light in a single color is used. On the other hand, the resin material that seals the LED chip is dispersed and blended with a phosphor that emits a predetermined color when excited by the blue light emitted from the LED chip, and generally emits white light as a whole. It is said. In addition, as the phosphor, for example, a yellow phosphor that emits yellow light, a green phosphor that emits green light, and a red phosphor that emits red light are used in appropriate combination, or any one of them is used. It can be used alone. The LED 17 is a so-called top type in which a surface opposite to the mounting surface with respect to the LED substrate 18 is a light emitting surface. The LED 17 has a light distribution such that the optical axis of the emitted light, that is, the traveling direction of light having the highest emission intensity coincides with the X-axis direction.
 LED基板18は、合成樹脂製(ガラスエポキシ樹脂製など)の板状とされ、表面が光の反射性に優れた白色を呈するものとされる。LED基板18は、図3に示すように、その主板面をY軸方向及びZ軸方向に並行させた姿勢、すなわち液晶パネル11及び導光部材19(光学部材15)の主板面と直交させた姿勢でシャーシ14内に収容されている。LED基板18は、シャーシ14における短辺側の両側板14cのうち、図3に示す左側の側板14bに対してねじなどによって取付状態に固定されている。LED基板18は、短辺側の側板14cのうち導光部材19における光入射面19bとの間に所定の間隔を空けた位置に配されている。このLED基板18におけるLED17の実装面には、金属膜(銅箔など)からなる配線パターン(図示せず)が形成されており、この配線パターンの端部に形成された端子部が、後述する外部のLED駆動部24に接続されることで、駆動電力がLED17に供給されるようになっている。なお、LED基板18をシャーシ14における端部に配された側板14cに取り付けることで、LED駆動部24への配線経路を容易に確保することが可能とされる。 The LED substrate 18 has a plate shape made of synthetic resin (such as glass epoxy resin), and has a white surface with excellent light reflectivity. As shown in FIG. 3, the LED board 18 has its main plate surface parallel to the Y-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, that is, orthogonal to the main plate surfaces of the liquid crystal panel 11 and the light guide member 19 (optical member 15). It is accommodated in the chassis 14 in a posture. The LED board 18 is fixed to the left side plate 14b shown in FIG. 3 among the side plates 14c on the short side of the chassis 14 by screws or the like. The LED substrate 18 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 in the side plate 14c on the short side. A wiring pattern (not shown) made of a metal film (copper foil or the like) is formed on the mounting surface of the LED 17 on the LED substrate 18, and terminal portions formed at the ends of the wiring pattern will be described later. By being connected to the external LED driving unit 24, driving power is supplied to the LED 17. In addition, by attaching the LED board 18 to the side plate 14c arranged at the end of the chassis 14, it is possible to easily secure a wiring path to the LED driving unit 24.
 このLED基板18は、図4及び図5に示すように、Z軸方向についての寸法が、互いに積層された4枚の導光部材19A~19Dの板厚寸法を足し合わせた大きさとほぼ同等とされている。そして、LED基板18には、LED17がZ軸方向、つまり導光部材19の積層方向に沿って4個並んで配されており、その設置数は導光部材19の積層枚数と一致している。なお、以下ではZ軸方向に並んだ4個のLED17を区別する場合には、最も表側に配されるものを「第1LED」として符号に添え字Aを、表側から2番目に配されるものを「第2LED」として符号に添え字Bを、表側から3番目に配されるものを「第3LED」として符号に添え字Cを、表側から4番目(最も裏側)に配されるものを「第4LED」として符号に添え字Dを付し、区別せずに総称する場合には、符号に添え字を付さないものとする。この4個のLED17A~17Dは、積層された4枚の導光部材19A~19Dに対してZ軸方向について個別に対応した位置に配されている。詳しくは、第1LED17Aが第1導光部材19Aに、第2LED17Bが第2導光部材19Bに、第3LED17Cが第3導光部材19Cに、第4LED17Dが第4導光部材19Dに、それぞれZ軸方向について一対一で対応した配置とされている。これら4個のLED17A~17Dは、対応する各導光部材19A~19DにおけるZ軸方向についてのほぼ中央位置に配されており、隣り合うLED17間の間隔、つまりLED17A~17Dの配列ピッチは、各導光部材19A~19Dの板厚寸法とほぼ一致している。4個のLED17A~17Dは、互いにY軸方向についてずれることなくZ軸方向に沿って直線的に並列しており、その並び方向は、光入射面19bに並行するものとされる。従って、Z軸方向に沿って並んだ各LED17A~17Dと次述する集光レンズ21との間の間隔は、全て等しいものとされ、さらには各LED17A~17Dとポリゴンミラー22との間の間隔も全て等しいものとされる。 As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the LED substrate 18 has a dimension in the Z-axis direction that is substantially equal to the sum of the thicknesses of the four light guide members 19A to 19D stacked on each other. Has been. Then, four LEDs 17 are arranged side by side in the Z-axis direction, that is, in the stacking direction of the light guide members 19, and the number of the LEDs 17 is equal to the number of the light guide members 19 stacked. . In the following description, when distinguishing the four LEDs 17 arranged in the Z-axis direction, the one arranged most on the front side is referred to as “first LED”, and the subscript A is arranged on the code second and from the front side. "Second LED" with the subscript B in the code, the third one from the front side, "third LED" with the subscript C in the code, the fourth from the front side (most back side) When the subscript D is added to the reference sign as “fourth LED” and the reference is made without distinction, the reference sign is not added. The four LEDs 17A to 17D are arranged at positions corresponding individually to the stacked four light guide members 19A to 19D in the Z-axis direction. Specifically, the first LED 17A is the first light guide member 19A, the second LED 17B is the second light guide member 19B, the third LED 17C is the third light guide member 19C, and the fourth LED 17D is the fourth light guide member 19D. It is arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with respect to the direction. These four LEDs 17A to 17D are arranged at substantially the center position in the Z-axis direction of the corresponding light guide members 19A to 19D, and the interval between adjacent LEDs 17, that is, the arrangement pitch of the LEDs 17A to 17D, is It almost coincides with the plate thickness dimension of the light guide members 19A to 19D. The four LEDs 17A to 17D are linearly aligned along the Z-axis direction without being shifted from each other in the Y-axis direction, and the arrangement direction is parallel to the light incident surface 19b. Accordingly, the intervals between the LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction and the condenser lens 21 described below are all equal, and further, the intervals between the LEDs 17A to 17D and the polygon mirror 22 are set. Are all equal.
 集光レンズ21は、図3に示すように、LED17と次述するポリゴンミラー22との間に介在するものとされ、相対的にポリゴンミラー22よりもLED17の近くに配されている。具体的には、集光レンズ21は、導光部材19のうち最もLED17に近い第1分割導光部材19SAの第1分割光入射面19bSAと所定の間隔を空けつつ対向状をなす位置に配されている。集光レンズ21は、全体として平面に視て半ドーナツ状に形成されており、LED17側の面(光入射側の面)が凹型の湾曲面をなすとともに、ポリゴンミラー22側の面(光出射側の面)が凸型の湾曲面をなしている。集光レンズ21は、LED17から発せられた光に集光作用を付与しつつ出射させることが可能とされ、その出射光がX軸方向に沿ってほぼ直進する(光入射面19bに並行する)とともにポリゴンミラー22に当たるような光学設計とされる。詳しくは、LED17から発せられる光には、光軸であるX軸方向に沿って進行する最も発光強度が高いものの他にも、光軸に対して傾いた方向に進行するもの、具体的にはY軸方向またはZ軸方向の成分を有するものも少なからず存在しているが、そのような光軸に対して傾いた方向に進行する光について集光レンズ21を透過する過程で屈折や反射などさせることで、Y軸方向またはZ軸方向の成分を有することなく光軸(X軸方向)に沿ってほぼ直進し且つポリゴンミラー22に当たる光に変換することができる。これにより、Z軸方向に沿って並んだ4個のLED17A~17Dから発せられた光は、それぞれがX軸方向に沿って直進して互いにZ軸方向について交わり合うことなく、個別にポリゴンミラー22によって反射されるようになっている。なお、LED17から発せられる光のうち、光軸であるX軸方向に沿って進行する最も発光強度が高いものについては、集光レンズ21を透過しても、屈折などの作用を殆ど受けることなく、そのまま光軸に沿ってほぼ直進するものとされる。 As shown in FIG. 3, the condenser lens 21 is interposed between the LED 17 and a polygon mirror 22 described below, and is disposed relatively closer to the LED 17 than the polygon mirror 22. Specifically, the condensing lens 21 is arranged at a position facing the first divided light incident surface 19bSA of the first divided light guide member 19SA closest to the LED 17 among the light guide members 19 with a predetermined interval. Has been. The condensing lens 21 as a whole is formed in a semi-doughnut shape in plan view, and the surface on the LED 17 side (surface on the light incident side) forms a concave curved surface and the surface on the polygon mirror 22 side (light emission). Side surface) is a convex curved surface. The condensing lens 21 can emit the light emitted from the LED 17 while condensing the light, and the emitted light travels substantially straight along the X-axis direction (parallel to the light incident surface 19b). At the same time, the optical design is such that it hits the polygon mirror 22. Specifically, the light emitted from the LED 17 includes light that travels in a direction inclined with respect to the optical axis, in addition to the light having the highest emission intensity that travels along the X-axis direction, which is the optical axis. There are a lot of components having a component in the Y-axis direction or the Z-axis direction. However, light that travels in a direction inclined with respect to the optical axis is refracted or reflected in the process of passing through the condenser lens 21. By doing so, it can be converted into light that travels substantially straight along the optical axis (X-axis direction) and strikes the polygon mirror 22 without having a component in the Y-axis direction or the Z-axis direction. As a result, the light emitted from the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction goes straight along the X-axis direction and does not cross each other in the Z-axis direction. Is to be reflected by. Of the light emitted from the LED 17, the light having the highest emission intensity that travels along the X-axis direction, which is the optical axis, is hardly affected by refraction even when transmitted through the condenser lens 21. It is assumed that the lens travels straight along the optical axis as it is.
 ポリゴンミラー22は、図3に示すように、集光レンズ21に対してX軸方向、すなわち集光レンズ21からの出射光の進行方向について、集光レンズ21とLED17との間の間隔よりも相対的に広い間隔を空けた位置に配されている。つまり、ポリゴンミラー22は、LED17及び集光レンズ21に対してX軸方向に沿って直線的に並んで配されている。ポリゴンミラー22は、導光部材19に対してその全体の長辺方向(分割導光部材19Sの並列方向、X軸方向)についてほぼ中央位置に配されている。そして、ポリゴンミラー22は、Z軸方向、つまり導光部材19の積層方向に沿う回転軸22aを有するとともに、その外周面に集光レンズ21からの光を反射する反射面22bを有しており、回転軸22a周りに一方向に回転されつつ反射面22bによって集光レンズ21からの光を反射することで、その反射光によって導光部材19の光入射面19bを走査することが可能とされる。このポリゴンミラー22は、図4及び図5に示すように、Z軸方向についての寸法が、互いに積層された4枚の導光部材19A~19Dの板厚寸法を足し合わせた大きさとほぼ同等とされ、LED基板18のZ軸方向についての寸法ともほぼ同等とされる。従って、ポリゴンミラー22の反射面22bは、Z軸方向に沿って並んだ4個のLED17A~17Dから発せられて集光レンズ21を介して照射される光をそれぞれ反射し、各導光部材19A~19Dの光入射面19bA~19bDをそれぞれ個別に走査することが可能とされている。 As shown in FIG. 3, the polygon mirror 22 has an X-axis direction with respect to the condenser lens 21, that is, in the traveling direction of the emitted light from the condenser lens 21, more than the distance between the condenser lens 21 and the LED 17. They are placed at relatively wide positions. That is, the polygon mirror 22 is arranged linearly along the X-axis direction with respect to the LED 17 and the condenser lens 21. The polygon mirror 22 is disposed at a substantially central position with respect to the light guide member 19 in the entire long side direction (the parallel direction of the divided light guide members 19S, the X-axis direction). The polygon mirror 22 has a rotation axis 22a along the Z-axis direction, that is, the stacking direction of the light guide member 19, and has a reflection surface 22b that reflects light from the condenser lens 21 on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 can be scanned with the reflected light by reflecting the light from the condensing lens 21 by the reflecting surface 22b while rotating around the rotation axis 22a in one direction. The As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the polygon mirror 22 has substantially the same dimension in the Z-axis direction as the sum of the thicknesses of the four light guide members 19A to 19D stacked on each other. The dimensions of the LED substrate 18 in the Z-axis direction are almost the same. Therefore, the reflection surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22 reflects the light emitted from the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction and irradiated through the condenser lens 21, and each light guide member 19A. It is possible to individually scan the light incident surfaces 19bA to 19bD of 19 to 19D.
 詳しくは、ポリゴンミラー22は、図3から図5に示すように、全体として回転軸22aに沿う方向(Z軸方向)から視た平面形状が正方形とされる角柱状をなしており、その外周面に4つの平坦な反射面22bが互いに隣接する形で形成されている。各反射面22bは、互いに面積及び各寸法が等しいものとされている。隣り合う反射面22bがなす角度は、90度とされる。各反射面22bは、Z軸方向(導光部材19の積層方向、LED17の並び方向)に沿ってほぼ真っ直ぐな面であるから、ポリゴンミラー22の回転位置によっては光入射面19bやLED基板18におけるLED17の実装面(LED17A~17Dの並び方向)に並行することが可能とされる(図3)。従って、各反射面22bによって反射された光は、X軸方向及びY軸方向に沿った平面方向に沿って直進するものとされ、Z軸方向の成分を有することが殆どない。これにより、Z軸方向に沿って並んだ4個のLED17A~17Dから発せられて集光レンズ21を介して反射面22bにて反射された光は、Z軸方向について交わり合うことなく、Z軸方向について対応した各導光部材19A~19Dに対して個別に入射されるようになっている。従って、第1LED17Aから発せられた光は、集光レンズ21及びポリゴンミラー22を介して第1導光部材19Aの光入射面19bAに入射した後、その光出射面19aAから選択的に出射するので、バックライト装置12全体の発光面のうち図3に示す最も下側の1/4の領域を担当することになる。同様に第2LED17Bから発せられた光は、第2導光部材19Bの光出射面19aBから選択的に出射し、バックライト装置12全体の発光面のうち図3に示す下側から2番目の1/4の領域を担当することになる。第3LED17Cから発せられた光は、第3導光部材19Cの光出射面19aCから選択的に出射し、バックライト装置12全体の発光面のうち図3に示す上側から2番目の1/4の領域を担当することになる。第4LED17Dから発せられた光は、第4導光部材19Dの光出射面19aDから選択的に出射し、バックライト装置12全体の発光面のうち図3に示す最も上側の1/4の領域を担当することになる。 Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the polygon mirror 22 has a prismatic shape having a square planar shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis 22 a (Z-axis direction) as a whole. Four flat reflective surfaces 22b are formed adjacent to each other on the surface. The reflecting surfaces 22b are equal in area and dimensions. The angle formed by the adjacent reflecting surfaces 22b is 90 degrees. Since each reflecting surface 22b is a substantially straight surface along the Z-axis direction (the direction in which the light guide members 19 are stacked and the direction in which the LEDs 17 are arranged), depending on the rotational position of the polygon mirror 22, the light incident surface 19b or the LED substrate 18 is used. The LED 17 can be mounted in parallel with the mounting surface of the LEDs 17 (alignment direction of the LEDs 17A to 17D) (FIG. 3). Accordingly, the light reflected by each reflecting surface 22b travels straight along the plane direction along the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, and has almost no component in the Z-axis direction. Thereby, the light emitted from the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction and reflected by the reflecting surface 22b via the condenser lens 21 does not intersect in the Z-axis direction. The light guide members 19A to 19D corresponding to the directions are individually incident. Accordingly, the light emitted from the first LED 17A enters the light incident surface 19bA of the first light guide member 19A via the condenser lens 21 and the polygon mirror 22, and then selectively exits from the light emitting surface 19aA. The lowermost ¼ region shown in FIG. 3 is in charge of the entire light emitting surface of the backlight device 12. Similarly, the light emitted from the second LED 17B is selectively emitted from the light emission surface 19aB of the second light guide member 19B, and is the second one from the lower side shown in FIG. / 4 area. The light emitted from the third LED 17C is selectively emitted from the light emission surface 19aC of the third light guide member 19C, and is the second quarter from the upper side shown in FIG. You will be in charge of the area. The light emitted from the fourth LED 17D is selectively emitted from the light emitting surface 19aD of the fourth light guide member 19D, and the uppermost ¼ region shown in FIG. I will be in charge.
 このポリゴンミラー22は、図3に示すように、電磁モータ(図示せず)によって駆動されることで、回転軸22a周りに図3に示す時計回り方向(矢線方向)に向けて一定の回転速度(角速度)でもって回転されるようになっている。そして、ポリゴンミラー22の回転に伴って、集光レンズ21からポリゴンミラー22に向かう光に対してなす各反射面22bの角度が時分割的に変化するとともに、反射面22bによって反射された光の進行方向が時分割的に変化するものとされる。具体的には、ポリゴンミラー22の平面形状が正方形であるから、反射面22bにて反射された光(反射光)の進行方向が、集光レンズ21からポリゴンミラー22に向かう光の進行方向に対してなす角度は、0度から180度の範囲(180度の角度範囲)で変化し得るものとされる。従って、ポリゴンミラー22による反射光は、ポリゴンミラー22の回転に伴って、導光部材19の光入射面19bをその長辺方向(X軸方向)に沿って図3に示す左側から右側へ向けて直線的に走査することが可能とされる。具体的には、上記反射光は、第1分割導光部材19SAの第1光入射面19bSAにおける図3に示す左端から、第8分割導光部材19SHの第8光入射面19bSHにおける図3に示す右端までを全域わたって連続的に走査できるものとされる。このポリゴンミラー22の回転速度は、反射光が第1光入射面19bSAの図3に示す左端から第8光入射面19bSHの図3に示す右端まで、一通り走査するのにかかる時間が、液晶パネル11における1枚の表示画像の表示期間、具体的には例えば1/60秒、1/120秒などと一致するように設定されている。また、各分割導光部材19Sにおける分割光入射面19bSを反射光により走査する時間(分割光入射面19bSに対する反射光の一走査期間)は、液晶パネル11における1枚の表示画像の表示期間(例えば1/60秒、1/120秒など)の約1/8程度とされる。また、ポリゴンミラー22と導光部材19とは、Y軸方向に沿って並んでおり、その並び方向は、LED17、集光レンズ21及びポリゴンミラー22の並び方向であるX軸方向とは直交する関係にある。 As shown in FIG. 3, the polygon mirror 22 is driven by an electromagnetic motor (not shown) to rotate around the rotation axis 22a in the clockwise direction (arrow direction) shown in FIG. It is rotated at a speed (angular speed). As the polygon mirror 22 rotates, the angle of each reflecting surface 22b with respect to the light from the condenser lens 21 toward the polygon mirror 22 changes in a time-division manner, and the light reflected by the reflecting surface 22b The traveling direction changes in a time-sharing manner. Specifically, since the polygonal mirror 22 has a square planar shape, the traveling direction of the light (reflected light) reflected by the reflecting surface 22 b is the traveling direction of the light from the condenser lens 21 toward the polygon mirror 22. The angle formed with respect to the angle can be changed in the range of 0 to 180 degrees (angle range of 180 degrees). Accordingly, the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 is directed from the left side to the right side shown in FIG. 3 along the long side direction (X-axis direction) of the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 as the polygon mirror 22 rotates. It is possible to scan linearly. Specifically, the reflected light is transmitted from the left end shown in FIG. 3 on the first light incident surface 19bSA of the first divided light guide member 19SA to FIG. 3 on the eighth light incident surface 19bSH of the eighth divided light guide member 19SH. It can be continuously scanned over the entire area up to the right end shown. The rotation speed of the polygon mirror 22 is such that the time it takes for the reflected light to scan from the left end of the first light incident surface 19bSA shown in FIG. 3 to the right end of the eighth light incident surface 19bSH shown in FIG. The display period of one display image on the panel 11 is set to coincide with, for example, 1/60 seconds, 1/120 seconds, or the like. Further, the time for scanning the divided light incident surface 19bS of each divided light guide member 19S with reflected light (one scanning period of reflected light with respect to the divided light incident surface 19bS) is the display period of one display image on the liquid crystal panel 11 ( For example, about 1/8 of 1/60 seconds, 1/120 seconds, etc.). The polygon mirror 22 and the light guide member 19 are arranged along the Y-axis direction, and the arrangement direction is orthogonal to the X-axis direction that is the arrangement direction of the LED 17, the condenser lens 21, and the polygon mirror 22. There is a relationship.
 同期検知部23は、図3に示すように、シャーシ14のうちLED基板18が取り付けられた側板14cに取り付けられている。同期検知部23は、LED基板18と導光部材19との間に位置しており、ポリゴンミラー22からの反射光を受光することが可能とされる。同期検知部23は、光を検出可能な光センサ(図示せず)を内蔵しており、ポリゴンミラー22からの反射光を検知することができる。この同期検知部23は、次述する制御部25に接続されるとともに、ポリゴンミラー22からの反射光を検知すると、検知信号を制御部25に向けて出力することが可能とされる。続いて、制御部25及びLED17の駆動制御について詳しく説明する。 As shown in FIG. 3, the synchronization detection unit 23 is attached to the side plate 14 c of the chassis 14 to which the LED board 18 is attached. The synchronization detection unit 23 is located between the LED substrate 18 and the light guide member 19 and can receive the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22. The synchronization detection unit 23 has a built-in optical sensor (not shown) that can detect light, and can detect reflected light from the polygon mirror 22. The synchronization detection unit 23 is connected to a control unit 25 described below, and can output a detection signal toward the control unit 25 when detecting reflected light from the polygon mirror 22. Subsequently, drive control of the control unit 25 and the LED 17 will be described in detail.
 制御部25は、図6に示すように、同期検知部23からの検知信号に基づいてLED駆動部24に信号を出力し、各LED17の駆動を制御することが可能とされる。詳しくは、制御部25は、同期検知部23から検知信号が入力されると、ポリゴンミラー22の回転速度に関する情報を参照しつつ、LED駆動部24に制御に係る信号を出力することで、所定のタイミングで各LED17の発光状態を制御することができる。このとき、制御部25は、各LED17の発光状態を、反射光による各分割光入射面19bSに対する走査期間毎に時分割して制御することが可能とされる。なお、制御部25は、第1LED17A~第4LED17Dにおける発光状態についても個別に制御することが可能とされる。以下、制御部25による各LED17の発光状態の具体的な制御方法について詳しく説明する。 As shown in FIG. 6, the control unit 25 can output a signal to the LED drive unit 24 based on the detection signal from the synchronization detection unit 23 to control the drive of each LED 17. Specifically, when the detection signal is input from the synchronization detection unit 23, the control unit 25 refers to information on the rotation speed of the polygon mirror 22 and outputs a signal related to the control to the LED drive unit 24 to obtain a predetermined signal. The light emission state of each LED 17 can be controlled at the timing. At this time, the control unit 25 can control the light emission state of each LED 17 in a time-sharing manner for each scanning period with respect to each divided light incident surface 19bS by reflected light. The control unit 25 can individually control the light emission states of the first LED 17A to the fourth LED 17D. Hereinafter, a specific control method of the light emission state of each LED 17 by the control unit 25 will be described in detail.
 具体的には、制御部25は、各LED17に印加する電圧値を一定としつつLED17を周期的に点滅させることで点灯期間と消灯期間との時間比率を変化させる、いわゆるPWM(Pulse Width Modulation:パルス幅変調)方式でもって各LED17の発光状態を制御しており、反射光による分割光入射面19bSに対する一走査期間中での点灯期間と消灯期間との時間比率を、各分割光入射面19bSに対する走査期間毎に個別に設定することが可能とされる。なお、上記一走査期間中における分割光入射面19bSに対する入射光量は、各LED17に印加される電圧値が一定であることから、点灯期間と消灯期間との時間比率によって一義的に定まるものとされる。従って、制御部25によって各分割光入射面19bSに対する入射光量を個別に自由に設定することができ、例えば各分割光入射面19bSに対する入射光量を全て同一とすることもできれば、全て異ならせることもできる。 Specifically, the control unit 25 changes the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period by periodically blinking the LED 17 while keeping the voltage value applied to each LED 17 constant, so-called PWM (Pulse Width Modulation: The light emission state of each LED 17 is controlled by a (pulse width modulation) method, and the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period in one scanning period with respect to the divided light incident surface 19bS by reflected light is set to each divided light incident surface 19bS. Can be set individually for each scanning period. Note that the amount of incident light on the split light incident surface 19bS during the one scanning period is uniquely determined by the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period because the voltage value applied to each LED 17 is constant. The Therefore, the control unit 25 can freely set the amount of incident light on each divided light incident surface 19bS individually. For example, the amount of incident light on each divided light incident surface 19bS can be all the same or different. it can.
 そして、この制御部25には、液晶パネル11の駆動を制御する液晶パネル制御部26から表示画像に係る信号が入力されるようになっている。従って、制御部25は、表示画像の輝度情報などに基づいて、各LED17の発光状態を制御することができる。詳しくは、まず、本実施形態に係るバックライト装置12全体の発光面は、図3に示すように、積層された4枚の各導光部材19A~19Dにおける各光出射面19aA~19aDが分担するY軸方向についての4つの領域と、各導光部材19A~19Dを構成する各分割導光部材19Sの各分割光出射面19aSA~19aSHが分担するX軸方向についての8つの領域とによってマトリクス状に32個の領域に区分されている。これに対応して、制御部25は、液晶パネル11における表示画像を、上記した発光面を構成する32個の領域に対応して32個の区分表示領域に区分するとともに、表示画像に係る信号から各区分表示領域に必要とされる輝度を算出し、その算出した輝度情報に基づいて、Z軸方向に並んだ4個のLED17A~17Dの発光状態を独立して駆動し、且つ各LED17A~17Dの発光状態を、各分割光入射面19bSに対する走査期間毎に時分割して制御している。 The control unit 25 receives a signal related to a display image from a liquid crystal panel control unit 26 that controls driving of the liquid crystal panel 11. Therefore, the control unit 25 can control the light emission state of each LED 17 based on the luminance information of the display image. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 3, the light emitting surfaces of the backlight device 12 as a whole according to the present embodiment are shared by the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aD of the four stacked light guide members 19A to 19D. Matrix with four regions in the Y-axis direction and eight regions in the X-axis direction shared by the divided light emitting surfaces 19aSA to 19aSH of the divided light guide members 19S constituting the light guide members 19A to 19D It is divided into 32 areas. Correspondingly, the control unit 25 divides the display image on the liquid crystal panel 11 into 32 divided display areas corresponding to the 32 areas constituting the light emitting surface, and signals related to the display image. From the calculated luminance information, the light emission states of the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged in the Z-axis direction are independently driven based on the calculated luminance information, and the LEDs 17A to 17A The light emission state of 17D is controlled by time division for each scanning period with respect to each divided light incident surface 19bS.
 本実施形態は以上のような構造であり、続いてその作用を説明する。液晶表示装置10を製造するには、それぞれ別途に製造した液晶パネル11、バックライト装置12及びベゼル13などを組み付けるようにする。以下、主にバックライト装置12の製造手順について説明する。 This embodiment has the structure as described above, and its operation will be described next. In order to manufacture the liquid crystal display device 10, the separately manufactured liquid crystal panel 11, backlight device 12, bezel 13 and the like are assembled. Hereinafter, the manufacturing procedure of the backlight device 12 will be mainly described.
 まず、シャーシ14内に各LED17を実装してなるLED基板18、集光レンズ21、ポリゴンミラー22、同期検知部23をそれぞれ収容する作業を行う一方で、それぞれ反射シート20を一体化した各導光部材19を収容する作業を行う。導光部材19の取り付けに際しては、図4に示すように、先行して第4導光部材19Dをシャーシ14の底板14aに取り付ける作業を行い、それから第3導光部材19Cを第4導光部材19Dの支持面19eD上に載置して積層させる。その後、第2導光部材19Bを第3導光部材19Cの支持面19eC上に載置し、第1導光部材19Aを第2導光部材19Bの支持面19eB上に載置することで、互いに積層される4枚の導光部材19A~19Dの組み付けが完了する。なお、各導光部材19A~19Dは、それぞれ8つの分割導光部材19Sに分割されているから、実際には各導光部材19A~19Dを構成する各分割導光部材19SをX軸方向に沿って並べつつ順次にZ軸方向に積層することで上記取り付け作業は行われる(図3及び図5)。 First, while the LED substrate 18 in which each LED 17 is mounted in the chassis 14, the condenser lens 21, the polygon mirror 22, and the synchronization detection unit 23 are respectively housed, the respective guides each integrating the reflection sheet 20 are performed. The operation | work which accommodates the optical member 19 is performed. When the light guide member 19 is attached, as shown in FIG. 4, the work of attaching the fourth light guide member 19D to the bottom plate 14a of the chassis 14 is performed in advance, and then the third light guide member 19C is attached to the fourth light guide member. It is placed and stacked on the support surface 19eD of 19D. Thereafter, the second light guide member 19B is placed on the support surface 19eC of the third light guide member 19C, and the first light guide member 19A is placed on the support surface 19eB of the second light guide member 19B. The assembly of the four light guide members 19A to 19D stacked on each other is completed. Since each light guide member 19A to 19D is divided into eight divided light guide members 19S, each divided light guide member 19S constituting each light guide member 19A to 19D is actually arranged in the X-axis direction. The above-described mounting operation is performed by sequentially stacking them in the Z-axis direction while arranging them (FIGS. 3 and 5).
 ここで、裏側に配された第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dにおける表側を向いた主板面は、表側に積層される第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cにおける各底面19cA~19cCよりも各光出射面19aB~19aDの分だけ面積が大きいものとされているので、第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cを載置する作業を容易に行うことができる。その上で、第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cにおける各底面19cA~19cCと、裏側に配された第2導光部材19B~19Dにおける各支持面19eB~19eDとが互いに並行する関係にあることから、第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cを安定的に支持することができる。さらには、作業者が各導光部材19A~19Dの積層順を誤った場合には、誤って表側に配された導光部材19には、誤って裏側に配された導光部材19によって支持されない部分が生じるため、支持状態が不安定なものとなるのに加え、その支持されない部分が浮き上がっているを目視により容易に確認することができるので、作業者は積層順を間違えたことに容易に気が付くことができる。つまり、各導光部材19A~19Dの積層順が正しかった場合と、各導光部材19A~19Dの積層順が誤っていた場合とを容易に判別することができるので、積層順を誤ったまま製品化されて出荷される事態をより確実に防ぐことができる。また、上記した導光部材19の積層作業を行うに際しては、各導光部材19A~19Dにおける光入射面19bA~19bDを互いに面一状に揃えるとともに、各分割導光部材19SにおけるY軸方向に沿った両側端面を互いに面一状に揃えるようにする。 Here, the main plate surfaces facing the front side in the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D arranged on the back side are the respective ones in the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C laminated on the front side. Since the area of each light emitting surface 19aB to 19aD is larger than that of the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC, the work of placing the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C can be easily performed. it can. In addition, the bottom surfaces 19cA to 19cC of the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C and the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD of the second light guide members 19B to 19D arranged on the back side are parallel to each other. Because of the relationship, the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C can be stably supported. Further, when the operator makes a mistake in the stacking order of the light guide members 19A to 19D, the light guide member 19 erroneously arranged on the front side is supported by the light guide member 19 erroneously arranged on the back side. Since the unsupported part is generated, the support state becomes unstable, and the unsupported part is easily lifted, so it is easy for the operator to make a mistake in the stacking order. You can notice. That is, it is possible to easily discriminate between the case where the stacking order of the light guide members 19A to 19D is correct and the case where the stacking order of the light guide members 19A to 19D is incorrect, so that the stacking order remains incorrect. It is possible to more surely prevent the product from being shipped. Further, when performing the above-described laminating operation of the light guide members 19, the light incident surfaces 19bA to 19bD of the light guide members 19A to 19D are aligned with each other, and in the Y-axis direction of the divided light guide members 19S. The both side end faces are aligned with each other.
 各導光部材19の取り付け作業が完了したら、シャーシ14にフレーム16を取り付け、そのフレーム16に対して各光学部材15及び液晶パネル11を順次載せるようにする。その後、ベゼル13を取り付けることで、液晶表示装置10が製造される。上記のようにして製造された液晶表示装置10の電源がONされると、液晶パネル制御部26により液晶パネル11の駆動が制御されるとともに、光源ユニットUからの光が各導光部材19の光入射面19bに入射してその内部を伝播してから光学部材15に向けて立ち上げられつつ光出射面19aから出射されることで液晶パネル11に向けて照射され、もって液晶パネル11に所定の画像が表示される。以下、バックライト装置12に係る作用について詳しく説明する。 When the attachment work of each light guide member 19 is completed, the frame 16 is attached to the chassis 14, and the optical members 15 and the liquid crystal panel 11 are sequentially mounted on the frame 16. Thereafter, the liquid crystal display device 10 is manufactured by attaching the bezel 13. When the power of the liquid crystal display device 10 manufactured as described above is turned on, the liquid crystal panel control unit 26 controls the driving of the liquid crystal panel 11 and the light from the light source unit U is transmitted to each light guide member 19. The light is incident on the light incident surface 19b, propagates through the inside thereof, and is emitted toward the liquid crystal panel 11 by being emitted from the light emitting surface 19a while being raised toward the optical member 15, and thus the liquid crystal panel 11 is irradiated with a predetermined amount. Is displayed. Hereinafter, the operation of the backlight device 12 will be described in detail.
 電源がONされると、光源ユニットUを構成する制御部25からの信号に基づいてLED駆動部25により各LED17が点灯されるとともに(図6)、電磁モータが駆動されることでポリゴンミラー22が回転軸22a周りに一定の回転速度でもって回転される。詳しくは、各LED17A~17Dからの光は、図3に示すように、集光レンズ21によって集光されることで、Y軸方向及びZ軸方向の成分を有することがなくX軸方向に沿って直進する光となってポリゴンミラー22に向けて出射された後、ポリゴンミラー22の反射面22bに当たることで、X軸方向及びY軸方向に沿った平面方向について所定の角度付けがなされた状態で反射される。ここで、ポリゴンミラー22の反射面22bによる反射光は、Z軸方向の成分を有することがないので、Z軸方向に沿って並んだ各LED17A~17Dから発せられた光は、反射面22bによって反射されてもZ軸方向について互いに交わり合うことがなく、Z軸方向について対応した各導光部材19A~19Dに対して個別に入射されるようになっている。なお、各LED17A~17Dから発せられた光が、各導光部材19A~19Dの光入射面19bA~19bDに到達するまでの光路長は、全て等しいものとされる。 When the power is turned on, each LED 17 is turned on by the LED drive unit 25 based on a signal from the control unit 25 constituting the light source unit U (FIG. 6), and the polygon motor 22 is driven by driving the electromagnetic motor. Is rotated around the rotation axis 22a at a constant rotation speed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the light from each of the LEDs 17A to 17D is condensed by the condenser lens 21, so that it does not have components in the Y-axis direction and the Z-axis direction and extends along the X-axis direction. After being emitted toward the polygon mirror 22 as light that travels straight forward, the light strikes the reflecting surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22, and a predetermined angle is given in the plane direction along the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. Reflected by. Here, since the light reflected by the reflection surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22 does not have a component in the Z-axis direction, the light emitted from the LEDs 17A to 17D arranged along the Z-axis direction is reflected by the reflection surface 22b. Even if they are reflected, they do not cross each other in the Z-axis direction, and are individually incident on the light guide members 19A to 19D corresponding to the Z-axis direction. Note that the optical path lengths until the light emitted from the LEDs 17A to 17D reaches the light incident surfaces 19bA to 19bD of the light guide members 19A to 19D are all equal.
 そして、ポリゴンミラー22による反射光は、各導光部材19A~19Dにおける光入射面19bA~19bDをそれぞれX軸方向について全長にわたって網羅的に走査することができるものとされる。具体的には、ポリゴンミラー22による反射光は、図7から図10に示すように、第1分割導光部材19SAの第1分割光入射面19bSAにおける同図左端から同図右端までを走査した後、その右隣の第2分割導光部材19SBの第2分割光入射面19bSB、第3分割導光部材19SCの第3分割光入射面19bSC・・・の順で走査し、第8分割導光部材19SHの第8分割光入射面19bSHを走査してから、再び第1分割導光部材19SAの第1分割光入射面19bSAを走査するものとされる。なお、ポリゴンミラー22の回転速度の設定により、反射光により全ての分割光入射面19bSが走査されるのにかかる時間は、液晶パネル11における1枚の表示画像の表示期間(例えば1/60秒、1/120秒など)とほぼ等しいものとされている。そして、各LED17A~17Dの発光状態は、ポリゴンミラー22の回転状態及び液晶パネル11に表示される表示画像に同期されるよう制御部25により制御されている。 The reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 can scan the light incident surfaces 19bA to 19bD of the light guide members 19A to 19D over the entire length in the X-axis direction. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 scanned from the left end to the right end of the first divided light incident surface 19bSA of the first divided light guide member 19SA. Thereafter, the second divided light incident surface 19bSB of the second divided light guide member 19SB on the right side, the third divided light incident surface 19bSC... Of the third divided light guide member 19SC are scanned in this order, and the eighth divided light guide is obtained. After the eighth divided light incident surface 19bSH of the optical member 19SH is scanned, the first divided light incident surface 19bSA of the first divided light guide member 19SA is scanned again. Note that the time required for scanning all the divided light incident surfaces 19bS by reflected light by setting the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 22 is the display period of one display image on the liquid crystal panel 11 (for example, 1/60 seconds). , 1/120 seconds, etc.). The light emission states of the LEDs 17A to 17D are controlled by the control unit 25 so as to be synchronized with the rotation state of the polygon mirror 22 and the display image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 11.
 具体的には、ポリゴンミラー22の反射面22bによって反射された光には、光入射面19bに入射するものの他にも、図11に示すように、同期検知部23に照射されるものが存在しているので、この同期検知部23によってポリゴンミラー22からの反射光を検知し、その検知信号が制御部25に出力されるのに基づいて、制御部25は、ポリゴンミラー22の回転状態に各LED17A~17Dの発光状態を同期させることができる。つまり、制御部25は、同期検知部23から検知信号を受けたタイミングと、ポリゴンミラー22の回転速度に関する情報とから、ポリゴンミラー22の反射光による各導光部材19A~19Dの光入射面19bA~19bDに対する走査位置を正確に算出することができるので、反射光が各分割光入射面19bSを走査する走査期間毎に、各LED17A~17Dの発光状態を時分割して制御することができるのである。この走査期間とは、図12に示すように、反射光が分割導光部材19Sの分割光入射面19bSにおける同図左端に照射された走査開始位置(同図一点鎖線に示す)から、分割光入射面19bSにおける同図右端に照射された走査終了位置(同図二点鎖線に示す)に至るまでに要した時間のことである。なお、制御部25においては、各分割光入射面19bS間に存在する空気層ASを反射光が走査し得る期間においては、各LED17A~17Dを消灯するような制御を行うのが好ましい。 Specifically, the light reflected by the reflecting surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22 includes what is irradiated on the synchronization detecting unit 23 as shown in FIG. 11 in addition to the light incident on the light incident surface 19b. Therefore, based on the detection of the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 by the synchronization detection unit 23 and the output of the detection signal to the control unit 25, the control unit 25 changes the rotation state of the polygon mirror 22. The light emission states of the LEDs 17A to 17D can be synchronized. That is, the control unit 25 determines the light incident surface 19bA of each of the light guide members 19A to 19D by the reflected light of the polygon mirror 22 from the timing at which the detection signal is received from the synchronization detection unit 23 and the information about the rotation speed of the polygon mirror 22. Since the scanning position with respect to .about.19bD can be accurately calculated, the light emission state of each of the LEDs 17A to 17D can be controlled in a time-sharing manner for each scanning period in which the reflected light scans each divided light incident surface 19bS. is there. As shown in FIG. 12, this scanning period means the divided light from the scanning start position (indicated by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 12) where the reflected light is applied to the left end of the divided light incident surface 19bS of the divided light guide member 19S. This is the time required to reach the scanning end position (indicated by the two-dot chain line in the figure) irradiated on the right end of the figure on the incident surface 19bS. In the control unit 25, it is preferable to perform control such that the LEDs 17A to 17D are turned off during a period in which the reflected light can scan the air layer AS existing between the divided light incident surfaces 19bS.
 そして、制御部25は、図6に示すように、液晶パネル11の駆動を制御する液晶パネル制御部26からの表示画像に係る信号に基づいて、各LED17A~17Dの発光状態を制御している。詳しくは、制御部25は、液晶パネル11から入力される表示画像に係る信号から、積層された4枚の各導光部材19A~19Dにおける各光出射面19aA~19aDが分担するY軸方向についての4つの領域と、各導光部材19A~19Dを構成する各分割導光部材19Sの各分割光出射面19aSA~19aSHが分担するX軸方向についての8つの領域とによってマトリクス状に区分される32個の区分表示領域に必要とされる輝度を算出し、その算出した輝度情報に基づいて、Z軸方向に並んだ4個のLED17A~17Dの発光状態を独立して駆動し、且つ各LED17A~17Dの発光状態を、各分割光入射面19bSに対する走査期間毎に時分割して制御している(図3を参照)。 Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the control unit 25 controls the light emission states of the LEDs 17A to 17D based on a signal related to the display image from the liquid crystal panel control unit 26 that controls the driving of the liquid crystal panel 11. . Specifically, the control unit 25 determines the Y-axis direction shared by the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aD of the stacked four light guide members 19A to 19D from the signal related to the display image input from the liquid crystal panel 11. And the eight regions in the X-axis direction shared by the divided light exit surfaces 19aSA to 19aSH of the divided light guide members 19S constituting the light guide members 19A to 19D. The luminance required for the 32 divided display areas is calculated, and based on the calculated luminance information, the light emission states of the four LEDs 17A to 17D arranged in the Z-axis direction are independently driven, and each LED 17A is driven. The light emission states of ˜17D are controlled in a time-sharing manner for each scanning period with respect to each divided light incident surface 19bS (see FIG. 3).
 具体的な各LED17A~17Dの駆動制御について説明すると、制御部25は、各分割光入射面19bSに対する走査期間毎に各LED17A~17Dの点灯期間と消灯期間との時間比率を、上記した各区分表示領域の輝度情報に基づいて決定しつつLED17を時分割で駆動制御している。例えば、相対的に暗い区分表示領域を分担する光出射面19aA~19aDにおける分割光出射面19bSを有する分割導光部材19Sの分割光入射面19bSの走査期間については、相対的に点灯期間を短くし消灯期間を長くすることで入射光量を相対的に少なくするのに対し、相対的に明るい区分表示領域を分担する光出射面19aA~19aDにおける分割光出射面19bSを有する分割導光部材19Sの分割光入射面19bSの走査期間については、相対的に点灯期間を長くし消灯期間を短くすることで入射光量を相対的に多くするよう、各LED17A~17Dの発光状態を走査期間毎に時分割して制御するのである。これにより、各導光部材19A~19Dを構成する合計32個の各分割導光部材19Sの分割光入射面19bSへの入射光量を個別に調整することができ、且つその入射光量を表示画像の輝度情報に基づいた適切なものとすることができる。 The specific drive control of each of the LEDs 17A to 17D will be described. The control unit 25 determines the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period of each LED 17A to 17D for each scanning period with respect to each divided light incident surface 19bS. The LED 17 is driven and controlled in a time-sharing manner while being determined based on the luminance information of the display area. For example, in the scanning period of the divided light incident surface 19bS of the divided light guide member 19S having the divided light emitting surface 19bS in the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aD sharing the relatively dark segmented display region, the lighting period is relatively short. In contrast, the incident light quantity is relatively reduced by extending the light extinction period, while the divided light guide member 19S having the divided light emitting surfaces 19bS in the light emitting surfaces 19aA to 19aD sharing the relatively bright divided display areas. Regarding the scanning period of the split light incident surface 19bS, the light emission states of the LEDs 17A to 17D are time-divided for each scanning period so that the incident light quantity is relatively increased by relatively lengthening the lighting period and shortening the extinguishing period. And control it. Thus, the amount of incident light on the divided light incident surface 19bS of each of the 32 divided light guiding members 19S constituting each of the light guiding members 19A to 19D can be individually adjusted, and the amount of incident light can be adjusted for the display image. It can be appropriate based on the luminance information.
 各分割光入射面19bSに入射した光は、反射シート20にて反射されたり、空気層ASとの界面にて全反射されることで、殆ど外部に漏れ出すことなく効率的に各分割導光部材19S内を伝播した後、分割光出射面19aSから出射される。そして、各分割光出射面19aSからの出射光は、液晶パネル11における各区分表示領域をそれぞれ分担して照射するのに対し、その出射光量は各分割光入射面19bSへの入射光量と概ね等しい関係にあることから、表示画像のコントラスト比を高めることができるのである。 The light incident on each split light incident surface 19bS is reflected by the reflection sheet 20 or totally reflected at the interface with the air layer AS, so that each split light guide can be efficiently performed without leaking to the outside. After propagating through the member 19S, the light is emitted from the split light exit surface 19aS. And the emitted light from each divided light emitting surface 19aS is applied to each divided display area in the liquid crystal panel 11, while the emitted light quantity is substantially equal to the incident light quantity to each divided light incident surface 19bS. Because of this relationship, the contrast ratio of the display image can be increased.
 詳しくは、第1導光部材19Aでは、図4に示すように、表側を向いた主板面の全域が光出射面19aAとされているので、内部を伝播する光は、反射シート20によって立ち上げられるとともに、反射部によって反射されるか、散乱部によって散乱されるかすることで、光出射面19aAに対する入射角が臨界角よりも小さな光となってその大部分が光出射面19aAから表側外部へと出射される。一方、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dに関しては、その表側を向いた主板面のうち光源ユニットU側の領域が表側に積層される第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cを支持する支持面19eB~19eDとされているので、内部を伝播する光は、支持面19eB~19eDを覆う第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cの反射シート20と、底面19cB~19cDに配された反射シート20との間で繰り返し反射されつつ光出射面19aB~19aD側に到達する。この過程では、第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19Dと、表側に積層された第1導光部材19A~第3導光部材19Cとの間が反射シート20によって仕切られているので、相互に光が行き交うことが回避されている。第2導光部材19B~第4導光部材19D内を伝播して光出射面19aB~19aD側に到達した光は、上記した第1導光部材19Aの場合と同様に光出射面19aB~19aDから表側外部へと出射される。また、各導光部材19における光入射面19bとは反対側の面19dは、反射シート20によって覆われているので、この面19dから外部へ光が漏れ出す事態をも防がれていて効率的に光出射面19aへと光が導かれるようになっている。 Specifically, in the first light guide member 19A, as shown in FIG. 4, since the entire area of the main plate surface facing the front side is the light emitting surface 19aA, the light propagating inside is raised by the reflection sheet 20 And is reflected by the reflecting portion or scattered by the scattering portion, so that the incident angle with respect to the light emitting surface 19aA becomes smaller than the critical angle, and most of the light is emitted from the light emitting surface 19aA to the front side outside. Is emitted. On the other hand, for the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D, the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide in which the region on the light source unit U side of the main plate surface facing the front side is laminated on the front side. Since the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD that support the member 19C are used, the light propagating through the inside reflects the reflection sheets 20 of the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C covering the support surfaces 19eB to 19eD, and the bottom surface. The light reaches the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD while being repeatedly reflected between the reflection sheets 20 arranged on 19cB to 19cD. In this process, the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D and the first light guide member 19A to the third light guide member 19C stacked on the front side are partitioned by the reflection sheet 20. It is avoided that light passes between each other. The light that has propagated through the second light guide member 19B to the fourth light guide member 19D and reached the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD side is the same as that of the first light guide member 19A described above, and the light exit surfaces 19aB to 19aD. To the outside of the front side. In addition, since the surface 19d opposite to the light incident surface 19b in each light guide member 19 is covered with the reflection sheet 20, it is possible to prevent the light from leaking from the surface 19d to the outside. Thus, light is guided to the light exit surface 19a.
 以上説明したように本実施形態のバックライト装置(照明装置)12は、光が入射される光入射面19bと、入射した光を出射させる光出射面19aとを有するとともに、互いの光出射面19a同士が光入射面19b側から視た奥行き方向について隣り合う形となるよう積層して配される複数の導光部材19と、導光部材19の積層方向に沿って並んで配される複数のLED(光源)17と、導光部材19の積層方向に沿った軸周りに回転(回動)されつつLED17からの光を反射し、その反射光により光入射面19bを走査するポリゴンミラー(回動反射体)22と、光入射面19bをポリゴンミラー22からの反射光による走査方向(X軸方向)について複数の領域(分割光入射面19bS)に区分したとき、各領域に対する反射光の走査期間に対応付けてLED17の発光状態を時分割して制御する制御部25とを備える。 As described above, the backlight device (illumination device) 12 of the present embodiment has the light incident surface 19b on which light is incident and the light emitting surface 19a for emitting the incident light, and the light emitting surfaces of each other. A plurality of light guide members 19 arranged so as to be adjacent to each other in the depth direction as viewed from the light incident surface 19b side, and a plurality arranged side by side along the direction in which the light guide members 19 are laminated. A polygon mirror that reflects light from the LED 17 while being rotated (rotated) around an axis along the stacking direction of the LED (light source) 17 and the light guide member 19, and scans the light incident surface 19b with the reflected light ( When the rotating reflector) 22 and the light incident surface 19b are divided into a plurality of regions (divided light incident surface 19bS) in the scanning direction (X-axis direction) by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22, the reflected light to each region And a control unit 25 for dividing and controlled during the light emission state of the LED17 in association with the scanning period.
 このように、複数の導光部材19が、互いの光出射面19aが光入射面19b側から視た奥行き方向について隣り合う形となるよう積層されるのに対し、LED17が導光部材19の積層方向について複数並んで配されており、各導光部材19の光入射面19bに対して積層方向について対応する各LED17からの光がポリゴンミラー22を介して入射されるから、各導光部材19に対応する各LED17の駆動を制御することで、各導光部材19における隣り合う各光出射面19aからの出射光量を選択的に制御することができる。 As described above, the plurality of light guide members 19 are stacked such that the light emission surfaces 19a are adjacent to each other in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface 19b side, whereas the LEDs 17 are A plurality of light guide members 19 are arranged side by side in the stacking direction, and light from each LED 17 corresponding to the stacking direction is incident on the light incident surface 19 b of each light guide member 19 through the polygon mirror 22. By controlling the driving of each LED 17 corresponding to 19, the amount of light emitted from each adjacent light emitting surface 19a in each light guide member 19 can be selectively controlled.
 その上で、LED17からの光を反射するポリゴンミラー22は、導光部材19の積層方向に沿った軸周りに回動されることで、反射光を光入射面19bに走査させることができ、その走査方向が上記した隣り合う光出射面19aの並び方向と交差する関係にある。そして、制御部25は、ポリゴンミラー22からの反射光による走査方向について区分された光入射面19bにおける各領域に対する反射光の走査期間に対応付けてLED17の発光状態を時分割して制御することで、各領域に対する反射光の入射光量、並びに光入射面19bの各領域に対応する光出射面19aにおける各領域からの出射光量を選択的に制御することができる。 In addition, the polygon mirror 22 that reflects the light from the LED 17 can be rotated around an axis along the stacking direction of the light guide member 19 to scan the reflected light on the light incident surface 19b. The scanning direction intersects with the arrangement direction of the adjacent light emitting surfaces 19a described above. Then, the control unit 25 controls the light emission state of the LED 17 in a time-sharing manner in association with the scanning period of the reflected light with respect to each region on the light incident surface 19b divided in the scanning direction by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22. Thus, it is possible to selectively control the incident light amount of the reflected light to each region and the emitted light amount from each region on the light emitting surface 19a corresponding to each region of the light incident surface 19b.
 従って、各光出射面19aの集合によって構成される当該バックライト装置12における発光面は、互いに隣り合う光出射面19aの並び方向(Y軸方向)と、光出射面19aの並び方向に対して交差する反射光による光入射面19bの走査方向(X軸方向)とに関してマトリクス状に区分されるとともにその区分された各領域毎に発光量を部分的に制御することが可能とされる。しかも、本実施形態によれば、従来のように多数のLEDを並列配置して各LEDの発光状態を個別に調整するようにしたものに比べると、LED17の使用数を削減することができ、例えばLED17に係るコストの低減を図ることができる。 Therefore, the light emitting surface in the backlight device 12 configured by the set of the light emitting surfaces 19a is in the arrangement direction of the light emitting surfaces 19a adjacent to each other (Y-axis direction) and the arrangement direction of the light emitting surfaces 19a. With respect to the scanning direction (X-axis direction) of the light incident surface 19b by the reflected light that intersects, the light emission amount can be partially controlled for each of the divided regions. Moreover, according to the present embodiment, the number of LEDs 17 used can be reduced compared to a conventional arrangement in which a large number of LEDs are arranged in parallel and the light emission state of each LED is individually adjusted. For example, the cost related to the LED 17 can be reduced.
 また、積層される導光部材19の数と、導光部材19の積層方向に沿って並んで配されるLED17の数とが一致している。このようにすれば、積層される各導光部材19に対して各LED17を個別に対応付けて配することができるから、各LED17の発光状態を個別に制御することで、対応する各導光部材19における光出射面19aからの出射光量を個別に制御することができる。 Further, the number of the light guide members 19 to be laminated matches the number of the LEDs 17 arranged along the direction in which the light guide members 19 are laminated. If it does in this way, since each LED17 can be individually matched and arranged with respect to each light guide member 19 laminated, each light guide corresponding to each light guide state can be controlled by individually controlling the light emission state of each LED17. The amount of light emitted from the light exit surface 19a of the member 19 can be individually controlled.
 また、LED17及びポリゴンミラー22の並び方向(X軸方向)と、ポリゴンミラー22及び導光部材19の並び方向(Y軸方向)とが互いに略直交するものとされる。このようにすれば、仮にLED、ポリゴンミラー及び導光部材が一直線に並んだ場合に比べると、バックライト装置12全体を小型に保つことができる。 Further, the arrangement direction of the LEDs 17 and the polygon mirror 22 (X-axis direction) and the arrangement direction of the polygon mirror 22 and the light guide member 19 (Y-axis direction) are substantially orthogonal to each other. In this way, the entire backlight device 12 can be kept small as compared with the case where the LED, the polygon mirror, and the light guide member are arranged in a straight line.
 また、ポリゴンミラー22は、走査方向について光入射面19bのほぼ中央位置に配されている。このようにすれば、ポリゴンミラー22にて反射された光のうち、走査方向について光入射面19bの一方の端部に至る光と、他方の端部に至る光とで光路長がほぼ同等となる。従って、例えばポリゴンミラー22からの反射光による光入射面19bの各領域の走査期間を設定するのが簡便となる、などの効果を得ることができる。 Further, the polygon mirror 22 is disposed at a substantially central position of the light incident surface 19b in the scanning direction. In this way, of the light reflected by the polygon mirror 22, the light path lengths of the light reaching one end of the light incident surface 19 b and the light reaching the other end in the scanning direction are substantially equal. Become. Therefore, for example, it is possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to set the scanning period of each region of the light incident surface 19 b by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22.
 また、LED17は、走査方向について光入射面19bの端側に配されている。このようにすれば、仮にLEDを走査方向について光入射面19bの中央側に配した場合に比べると、例えばLED17に対する配線の接続が容易になるなどの効果を得ることができる。 The LED 17 is disposed on the end side of the light incident surface 19b in the scanning direction. In this way, compared to the case where the LED is arranged on the center side of the light incident surface 19b in the scanning direction, it is possible to obtain an effect such as easy connection of the wiring to the LED 17, for example.
 また、光入射面19bにおける複数の領域は、走査方向についての寸法が互いにほぼ同じとなるよう区分されている。このようにすれば、光入射面19bの各領域に対するポリゴンミラー22からの反射光による走査期間をほぼ同じとすることができるから、制御部25による制御がより容易なものとなる。 Further, the plurality of regions on the light incident surface 19b are divided so that the dimensions in the scanning direction are substantially the same. In this way, the scanning period of the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 for each region of the light incident surface 19b can be made substantially the same, so that the control by the control unit 25 becomes easier.
 また、回動反射体は、一方向に回転するポリゴンミラー22により構成されている。このようにすれば、一方向に回転するポリゴンミラー22による反射光により光入射面19bにおける各領域を走査することができるから、特に光入射面19bを高速で走査する場合に好適となる。 Further, the rotating reflector is constituted by a polygon mirror 22 that rotates in one direction. In this way, each region on the light incident surface 19b can be scanned by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 rotating in one direction, which is particularly suitable for scanning the light incident surface 19b at a high speed.
 また、ポリゴンミラー22は、その回転軸22aに沿う方向から視た平面形状が正多角形とされる。このようにすれば、LED17からの光を反射する面が全て均一な大きさとされるから、例えばポリゴンミラー22における回転速度を一定とすれば、単位時間当たりの光入射面19bに対する走査範囲を一定とすることができる。 The polygon mirror 22 has a regular polygonal shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis 22a. In this way, the surfaces that reflect the light from the LED 17 are all uniform in size. For example, if the rotational speed of the polygon mirror 22 is constant, the scanning range for the light incident surface 19b per unit time is constant. It can be.
 また、ポリゴンミラー22は、その回転軸22aに沿う方向から視た平面形状が正方形とされる。このようにすれば、LED17からの光を反射可能な角度範囲がほぼ180度となる。従って、特に導光部材19における光入射面19bが走査方向について大きな場合に好適となり、また当該バックライト装置12におけるポリゴンミラー22における配置の自由度が高くなる。 Further, the polygonal mirror 22 has a square shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis 22a. In this way, the angle range in which the light from the LED 17 can be reflected is approximately 180 degrees. Therefore, it is suitable particularly when the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 is large in the scanning direction, and the degree of freedom of arrangement in the polygon mirror 22 in the backlight device 12 is increased.
 また、LED17とポリゴンミラー22との間に介在し、LED17からの光を集光してポリゴンミラー22に向けて出射させる集光レンズ(集光部材)22を備える。このようにすれば、LED17から発せられた光をポリゴンミラー22に対して効率的に供給することができる。これにより、導光部材19の光入射面19bに対してLED17からの光を無駄なく入射させることができて利用効率を向上させることができるので、輝度の向上や低消費電力化を図ることができる。 Further, a condensing lens (condensing member) 22 is provided between the LED 17 and the polygon mirror 22 and condenses the light from the LED 17 and emits the light toward the polygon mirror 22. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 17 can be efficiently supplied to the polygon mirror 22. As a result, the light from the LED 17 can be incident on the light incident surface 19b of the light guide member 19 without waste, and the utilization efficiency can be improved. Therefore, the luminance can be improved and the power consumption can be reduced. it can.
 また、集光レンズ22は、ポリゴンミラー22に向けて出射させる光の進行方向が、光入射面19bに並行するよう、LED17からの光を集光するものとされる。このようにすれば、光入射面19bに並行する光をポリゴンミラー22によって反射して角度付けすることで、光入射面19bにおける各領域に入射させることができる。 The condensing lens 22 condenses the light from the LED 17 so that the traveling direction of the light emitted toward the polygon mirror 22 is parallel to the light incident surface 19b. In this way, the light parallel to the light incident surface 19b is reflected by the polygon mirror 22 and angled, so that it can be incident on each region on the light incident surface 19b.
 また、制御部25は、LED17を周期的に点滅させ、点灯期間と消灯期間との時間比率を変化させるようにしている。このように、LED17の発光状態を、いわゆるPWM(Pulse Width Modulation:パルス幅変調)方式により制御しているので、LED17に付与する電圧値を一定にすることができてその制御に係る回路構成を簡単なものとすることができ、また調光範囲を十分に大きく確保できてLED17の発光状態をより適切に制御することができる。 Further, the control unit 25 periodically blinks the LED 17 to change the time ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period. Thus, since the light emission state of the LED 17 is controlled by a so-called PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) method, the voltage value applied to the LED 17 can be made constant, and a circuit configuration related to the control can be obtained. It can be made simple, and the dimming range can be secured sufficiently large, and the light emission state of the LED 17 can be controlled more appropriately.
 また、導光部材19は、光入射面19bにおける複数の領域毎に分割された複数の分割導光部材19Sから構成される。このようにすれば、光入射面19bにおける各領域に入射した光を、各分割導光部材19Sにより個別に導光させてから出射させることができる。 The light guide member 19 is composed of a plurality of divided light guide members 19S divided into a plurality of regions on the light incident surface 19b. If it does in this way, the light which injected into each area | region in the light-incidence surface 19b can be radiate | emitted after light-guided separately by each division | segmentation light guide member 19S.
 また、隣り合う分割導光部材19Sの間には、分割導光部材19Sよりも相対的に屈折率が低い低屈折率層が介在している。このようにすれば、分割導光部材19S内の光が低屈折率層側に出射し難くなるから、隣り合う分割導光部材19S間で光が行き交うのを防ぐことができ、隣り合う分割導光部材19Sの光学的な独立性を担保することができる。また、各分割導光部材19Sからの出射光量を十分に確保できて輝度の向上を図ることができる。 Further, a low refractive index layer having a refractive index relatively lower than that of the divided light guide member 19S is interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S. This makes it difficult for the light in the divided light guide member 19S to be emitted to the low refractive index layer side, so that the light can be prevented from passing between the adjacent divided light guide members 19S, and the adjacent divided light guide member 19S can be prevented. The optical independence of the optical member 19S can be ensured. In addition, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of light emitted from each divided light guide member 19S and improve luminance.
 また、積層される複数の導光部材19は、光入射面19b同士が互いに面一状をなすよう配されている。このようにすれば、複数の導光部材19を積層する際に、各光入射面19bを面一状に揃えることで、各導光部材19の位置決めを容易に図ることができて作業性に優れる。 Further, the light guide members 19 to be stacked are arranged so that the light incident surfaces 19b are flush with each other. In this way, when the light guide members 19 are stacked, the light incident surfaces 19b are aligned so that the light guide members 19 can be easily positioned, thereby improving workability. Excellent.
 また、ポリゴンミラー22は、LED17からの光を反射するとともに光入射面19bに並行可能な反射面22bを有するのに対し、積層方向に沿って並ぶ複数のLED17は、反射面22bに並行するよう直線的に並んで配されている。このようにすれば、積層方向に沿って並ぶ各LED17から発せられた光がポリゴンミラー22の反射面22bにて反射されてから、積層された各導光部材19の各光入射面19bに入射するまでの光路長を、各LED17毎にほぼ等しくすることができる。これにより、制御部25により各LED17の発光状態を制御するのがより容易なものとなる。 The polygon mirror 22 has a reflection surface 22b that reflects the light from the LED 17 and can be parallel to the light incident surface 19b, whereas the plurality of LEDs 17 arranged along the stacking direction are parallel to the reflection surface 22b. They are arranged in a straight line. In this way, the light emitted from the LEDs 17 arranged in the stacking direction is reflected by the reflecting surface 22b of the polygon mirror 22, and then enters the light incident surfaces 19b of the stacked light guide members 19. The optical path length until this can be made substantially equal for each LED 17. Thereby, it becomes easier to control the light emission state of each LED 17 by the control unit 25.
 また、導光部材19は、光出射面19aとは反対側に位置し且つ光出射面19aに並行する底面19cを有している。このようにすれば、仮に光出射面と底面とが並行せず導光部材19が先細り状をなす場合との比較において、当該バックライト装置12の製造時に導光部材19の積層順が正しかったときと、同積層順を誤ったときとを判別し易くなるなどの効果が得られ、さらには強度上も優れる。 The light guide member 19 has a bottom surface 19c located on the opposite side of the light emitting surface 19a and parallel to the light emitting surface 19a. In this way, the order in which the light guide members 19 are stacked at the time of manufacturing the backlight device 12 is correct in comparison with the case where the light exit surface and the bottom surface are not parallel and the light guide member 19 is tapered. It is possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to discriminate between the time and the case where the stacking order is wrong, and the strength is also excellent.
 また、積層される複数の導光部材19には、相対的に光出射側に配される第1導光部材19A(第2導光部材19B、第3導光部材19C)と、相対的に第1導光部材19Aに対して光出射側とは反対側に配される第2導光部材19B(第3導光部材19C、第4導光部材19D)とが少なくとも含まれており、第2導光部材19Bは、第1導光部材19Aが有する底面19cA(底面19cB、底面19cC)を支持する支持面19eB(支持面19eC、支持面19eD)を有するとともに、この支持面19eBに対して光入射面19b側から視た奥行き方向について隣り合う形で光出射面19aB(光出射面19aC、光出射面19aD)を有している。このようにすれば、支持面19eBによって第1導光部材19Aを安定的に支持することができて製造時に第2導光部材19Bに対して第1導光部材19Aを積層する際の作業性に優れるとともに、第2導光部材19Bが有する光出射面19aBに対して第1導光部材19Aが積層されることが避けられるので、同光出射面19aBからの光を第1導光部材19Aを介することなく出射させることができる。 Further, the plurality of light guide members 19 to be stacked are relatively relative to the first light guide member 19A (the second light guide member 19B and the third light guide member 19C) disposed on the light emitting side. At least a second light guide member 19B (a third light guide member 19C and a fourth light guide member 19D) disposed on the side opposite to the light emitting side with respect to the first light guide member 19A is included. 2 The light guide member 19B has a support surface 19eB (support surface 19eC, support surface 19eD) that supports the bottom surface 19cA (the bottom surface 19cB, the bottom surface 19cC) of the first light guide member 19A, and the support surface 19eB The light exit surface 19aB (light exit surface 19aC, light exit surface 19aD) is adjacent to the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface 19b side. In this way, the first light guide member 19A can be stably supported by the support surface 19eB, and workability when the first light guide member 19A is stacked on the second light guide member 19B during manufacturing. In addition, since the first light guide member 19A can be avoided from being laminated on the light output surface 19aB of the second light guide member 19B, the light from the light output surface 19aB is transmitted to the first light guide member 19A. It can be made to emit without going through.
 また、積層される複数の導光部材19は、隣り合う光出射面19a同士の面積がほぼ等しいものとされる。このようにすれば、各光出射面19aからの出射光における単位面積当たりの明るさを調整する上で、各LED17の駆動を制御するのが容易なものとなる。 Further, in the plurality of light guide members 19 to be stacked, the areas of the adjacent light emitting surfaces 19a are substantially equal. This makes it easy to control the drive of each LED 17 in adjusting the brightness per unit area in the light emitted from each light exit surface 19a.
 また、積層される複数の導光部材19は、走査方向についての寸法が互いに等しいものとされる。このようにすれば、複数の導光部材19を積層するにあたり、互いに走査方向についての端面を揃えた状態とすれば、走査方向について各導光部材19同士を全域にわたって積層させることができる。従って、各導光部材19を容易に位置決めすることができて作業性に優れる。 Further, the plurality of light guide members 19 to be stacked have the same dimensions in the scanning direction. In this way, when the plurality of light guide members 19 are stacked, the light guide members 19 can be stacked over the entire area in the scanning direction if the end faces in the scanning direction are aligned. Therefore, each light guide member 19 can be easily positioned and the workability is excellent.
 また、導光部材19は、光出射面19aとは反対側に位置する底面19cを有しており、底面19cに沿って配されるとともに光を反射させる反射シート(反射部材が備えられている。このようにすれば、反射シート20により導光部材19内の光を反射)20させることで、導光部材19内において光を効率的に伝播させることができるとともに光を光出射面19aに向けて立ち上げることができる。 The light guide member 19 has a bottom surface 19c located on the side opposite to the light emitting surface 19a. The light guide member 19 is provided along the bottom surface 19c and includes a reflection sheet (reflecting member) that reflects light. In this way, by reflecting the light in the light guide member 19 by the reflection sheet 20, the light can be efficiently propagated in the light guide member 19 and the light is transmitted to the light emitting surface 19a. Can be launched.
 また、反射シート20は、導光部材19における光入射面19bとは反対側の面19dを覆うものとされる。このようにすれば、導光部材19内を伝播する光が導光部材19における光入射面19bとは反対側の面19dから出射するのを防ぐことができ、もって光の利用効率をより向上させることができる。 The reflection sheet 20 covers the surface 19d of the light guide member 19 opposite to the light incident surface 19b. In this way, light propagating in the light guide member 19 can be prevented from being emitted from the surface 19d of the light guide member 19 opposite to the light incident surface 19b, thereby further improving the light utilization efficiency. Can be made.
 また、光源は、LED17とされる。このようにすれば、高輝度化及び低消費電力化などを図ることができる。 Further, the light source is the LED 17. In this way, high brightness and low power consumption can be achieved.
 <実施形態2>
 本発明の実施形態2を図13または図14によって説明する。この実施形態2では、導光部材119の形状を変更したものを示す。なお、上記した実施形態1と同様の構造、作用及び効果について重複する説明は省略する。
<Embodiment 2>
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 13 or FIG. In this Embodiment 2, what changed the shape of the light guide member 119 is shown. In addition, the overlapping description about the same structure, an effect | action, and effect as above-mentioned Embodiment 1 is abbreviate | omitted.
 本実施形態に係る導光部材119のうち、表側に第1導光部材119A~第3導光部材119Cが積層される第2導光部材119B~第4導光部材119Dには、図13に示すように、光出射面119aB~119aDを有するとともに支持面119eよりも表側に突出する突出出光部27が設けられている。各突出出光部27は、有している各光出射面119aB~119aDが互いに面一状をなすとともに、第1導光部材119Aの光出射面119aAに対しても面一状をなすよう形成されている。従って、第2導光部材119Bが有する突出出光部27Bにおける突出寸法は、第1導光部材119Aの板厚寸法分程度の大きさとされる。同様に第3導光部材119Cが有する突出出光部27Cにおける突出寸法は、第1導光部材119Aと第2導光部材119Bとの板厚寸法を足し合わせた程度の大きさとされ、さらには第4導光部材119Dが有する突出出光部27Dにおける突出寸法は、第1導光部材119A~第3導光部材119Cの板厚寸法を足し合わせた程度の大きさとされる。これにより、各導光部材119A~119Dにおける各光出射面119aA~119aD間に段差が生じるのを解消することができ、各光出射面119aA~119aDと光学部材115との間の間隔、つまり各光出射面119aA~119aDからの出射光が光学部材115に到達するまでの光路長を均一化することができる。もって、各光出射面119aA~119aDからの出射光によって光学部材115をムラなく照射することができる。 Among the light guide members 119 according to the present embodiment, the second light guide member 119B to the fourth light guide member 119D in which the first light guide member 119A to the third light guide member 119C are laminated on the front side are shown in FIG. As shown, a projecting light exiting portion 27 is provided that has light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD and projects to the front side of the support surface 119e. Each protruding light exit portion 27 is formed such that the light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD that it has are flush with each other and the light exit surface 119aA of the first light guide member 119A is also flush. ing. Accordingly, the projecting dimension of the projecting light output portion 27B of the second light guide member 119B is about the plate thickness dimension of the first light guide member 119A. Similarly, the projecting dimension of the projecting light output portion 27C of the third light guide member 119C is set to a size that is the sum of the plate thickness dimensions of the first light guide member 119A and the second light guide member 119B. The projecting dimension of the projecting light output portion 27D of the fourth light guide member 119D is set to a size that is the sum of the plate thickness dimensions of the first light guide member 119A to the third light guide member 119C. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a step between the light emitting surfaces 119aA to 119aD in each of the light guide members 119A to 119D, and the distance between each light emitting surface 119aA to 119aD and the optical member 115, that is, each It is possible to equalize the optical path length until the light emitted from the light emitting surfaces 119aA to 119aD reaches the optical member 115. Therefore, the optical member 115 can be irradiated evenly by the emitted light from each of the light emitting surfaces 119aA to 119aD.
 上記したように突出出光部27によって各光出射面119aA~119aDを面一状にすることで、次の効果をも得ることができる。例えば、図14に示すように、バックライト装置112′の構成を変更し、導光部材119に対して光学部材115′を直接積層して配置するような構成とした場合には、互いに面一状をなす各光出射面119aA~119aDによって光学部材115′を安定的に支持することができる、という効果を得ることができるのである。 As described above, by making the light emitting surfaces 119aA to 119aD flush with the protruding light emitting portion 27, the following effects can be obtained. For example, as shown in FIG. 14, when the configuration of the backlight device 112 ′ is changed and the optical member 115 ′ is directly stacked on the light guide member 119, they are flush with each other. The optical member 115 'can be stably supported by the light emitting surfaces 119aA to 119aD having a shape.
 第2導光部材119B~第4導光部材119Dにおける底面119cB~119cDのうち、平面に視て突出出光部27B~27Dとそれぞれ重畳する部分には、図13に示すように、傾斜面28が形成されている。傾斜面28は、Y軸方向について図13に示す左方、つまり光入射面119b側から視た奥行き方向に向けて表側に立ち上がるような勾配を有している。反射シート120は、この傾斜面28に沿って配されているので、第2導光部材119B~第4導光部材119D内を伝播する光のうち突出出光部27B~27D側に達した光は、反射シート120における傾斜面28に沿った部分によって角度付けされることで、効率的に光出射面119aB~119aDに向けて立ち上げられる。ここで、第2導光部材119B~第4導光部材119Dは、第1導光部材119Aに比べると、光出射面119aB~119aDが光源ユニットU(光入射面119b)から遠い位置にあるため、光の利用効率の点で相対的に劣るものの、上記した傾斜面28によって光を光出射面119aB~119aD側に効率的に立ち上げることができるので、第1導光部材119Aとの間で光の利用効率に差が生じ難くなっている。 Of the bottom surfaces 119cB to 119cD of the second light guide member 119B to the fourth light guide member 119D, as shown in FIG. Is formed. The inclined surface 28 has a slope that rises to the front side in the depth direction viewed from the left side in FIG. 13 in the Y-axis direction, that is, from the light incident surface 119b side. Since the reflection sheet 120 is disposed along the inclined surface 28, the light that has reached the protruding light output portions 27B to 27D among the light propagating through the second light guide member 119B to the fourth light guide member 119D is not reflected. By being angled by the portion along the inclined surface 28 in the reflection sheet 120, the reflection sheet 120 is efficiently launched toward the light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD. Here, in the second light guide member 119B to the fourth light guide member 119D, the light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD are located farther from the light source unit U (light incident surface 119b) than the first light guide member 119A. Although it is relatively inferior in terms of light utilization efficiency, light can be efficiently launched to the light exit surfaces 119aB to 119aD by the inclined surface 28 described above, and therefore, between the first light guide member 119A and the first light guide member 119A. Differences in light use efficiency are less likely to occur.
 なお、第1導光部材119Aは、第2導光部材119B~第4導光部材119Dに比べると、光出射面119aAが相対的に光源ユニットU(光入射面119b)の近くにあるため、傾斜面28を形成せずとも十分な光の利用効率が確保されている。むしろ、第1導光部材119Aは、底面119cAを第2導光部材119Bの支持面119eBに並行する形態とすることで、支持姿勢の安定化を図ることができるものとされる。 Note that the first light guide member 119A has a light exit surface 119aA relatively closer to the light source unit U (light incident surface 119b) than the second light guide member 119B to the fourth light guide member 119D. Even if the inclined surface 28 is not formed, sufficient light use efficiency is ensured. Rather, the first light guide member 119A can stabilize the support posture by setting the bottom surface 119cA in parallel with the support surface 119eB of the second light guide member 119B.
 以上説明したように本実施形態によれば、第2導光部材119B(第3導光部材119C、第4導光部材119D)には、光出射面119aB(光出射面119aC、光出射面119aD)を有するとともに支持面119eB(支持面119eC、支持面119eD)よりも光出射側に突出する突出出光部27が設けられている。このようにすれば、突出出光部27が支持面119eBよりも光出射側に突出する形態とされているから、第1導光部材119A(第2導光部材119B、第3導光部材119C)が有する光出射面119aA(光出射面119aB、光出射面119aC)と、第2導光部材119Bにおける突出出光部27が有する光出射面119aBとの間で段差を緩和または解消することができる。これにより、例えば光出射面119aに他の部材(光学部材115′など)を載せた場合の安定性に優れ、また光が各光出射面119aを出射してから上記した他の部材に達するまでの光路長の差を緩和または解消することができる。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second light guide member 119B (third light guide member 119C, fourth light guide member 119D) has the light emission surface 119aB (light emission surface 119aC, light emission surface 119aD). ) And a protruding light emitting portion 27 that protrudes further to the light emission side than the support surface 119eB (support surface 119eC, support surface 119eD). In this way, since the protruding light exiting portion 27 is configured to protrude to the light emitting side from the support surface 119eB, the first light guide member 119A (second light guide member 119B, third light guide member 119C). The step can be reduced or eliminated between the light exit surface 119aA (light exit surface 119aB, light exit surface 119aC) of the light exit surface 119aB of the projecting light exit portion 27 of the second light guide member 119B. Thereby, for example, when other members (such as the optical member 115 ′) are placed on the light exit surface 119 a, the stability is excellent, and from when the light exits each light exit surface 119 a to the other members described above. The difference in optical path length can be reduced or eliminated.
 また、第2導光部材119Bにおける突出出光部27は、有している光出射面119aBが、第1導光部材119Aが有する光出射面119aAと面一状をなすよう形成されている。このようにすれば、第1導光部材119Aが有する光出射面119aと、第2導光部材119Bにおける突出出光部27が有する光出射面119aBとの間で段差を解消することができる。これにより、例えば光出射面119aに他の部材を載せた場合の安定性に極めて優れ、また光が各光出射面119aを出射してから上記した他の部材に達するまでの光路長の差を解消することができる。 Further, the protruding light exiting portion 27 in the second light guide member 119B is formed such that the light exit surface 119aB it has is flush with the light exit surface 119aA of the first light guide member 119A. In this way, a step can be eliminated between the light exit surface 119a of the first light guide member 119A and the light exit surface 119aB of the protruding light exit portion 27 of the second light guide member 119B. Thereby, for example, when the other member is placed on the light emitting surface 119a, the stability is extremely excellent, and the difference in the optical path length from when the light exits each light emitting surface 119a to the other member described above can be obtained. Can be resolved.
 また、第2導光部材119Bが有する底面119cB(底面119cC、底面119cD)のうち、平面に視て突出出光部27と重畳する部分には、光入射面119b側から視た奥行き方向に向けて光出射側に立ち上がるような勾配を持つ傾斜面28が形成されている。このようにすれば、第2導光部材119Bが有する光出射面119aBは、第1導光部材119Aが有する光出射面119aAに比べると、光入射面119bから上記奥行き方向について相対的に遠い位置にあるため、光入射面119bに入射した光を光出射面119aBにまで導いて出射させる上での光の利用効率の点で相対的に劣るものの、底面119cBのうち光出射面119aBを有する突出出光部27と重畳する部分に傾斜面28を形成しているから、内部の光を光出射面119aBに向けて効率的に立ち上げることができる。これにより、第2導光部材119Bにおける光の利用効率を改善することができ、第1導光部材119Aとの間で光の利用効率に差が生じ難くすることができる。 Of the bottom surface 119cB (bottom surface 119cC, bottom surface 119cD) of the second light guide member 119B, a portion overlapping the protruding light emitting portion 27 when viewed in plan is directed in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface 119b side. An inclined surface 28 having a gradient that rises toward the light emitting side is formed. In this way, the light exit surface 119aB of the second light guide member 119B is relatively far from the light entrance surface 119b in the depth direction as compared to the light exit surface 119aA of the first light guide member 119A. Therefore, although it is relatively inferior in terms of light use efficiency in guiding the light incident on the light incident surface 119b to the light emitting surface 119aB and emitting it, the protrusion having the light emitting surface 119aB among the bottom surface 119cB. Since the inclined surface 28 is formed in a portion overlapping with the light emitting portion 27, the internal light can be efficiently launched toward the light emitting surface 119aB. Thereby, the light use efficiency in the second light guide member 119B can be improved, and a difference in the light use efficiency between the first light guide member 119A can be made difficult to occur.
 <実施形態3>
 本発明の実施形態3を図15または図16によって説明する。この実施形態3では、光源ユニット2Uを一対設けるとともに導光部材219の設置数や配置を変更したものを示す。なお、上記した実施形態1と同様の構造、作用及び効果について重複する説明は省略する。
<Embodiment 3>
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 15 or FIG. In the third embodiment, a pair of light source units 2U is provided and the number and arrangement of light guide members 219 are changed. In addition, the overlapping description about the same structure, an effect | action, and effect as above-mentioned Embodiment 1 is abbreviate | omitted.
 本実施形態に係る光源ユニット2Uは、図15及び図16に示すように、シャーシ214における長辺側の両端部に一対配されている。詳しくは、シャーシ214における長辺側の両側板214bと導光部材219との間には、それぞれ所定の間隔が空けられており、その空間にそれぞれ光源ユニット2Uが配されている。各光源ユニット2Uを構成するLED217、LED基板218、集光レンズ221、ポリゴンミラー222及び同期検知部223は、導光部材219の中心位置を対称点とした点対称となる配置とされている。これに対し、導光部材219は、Z軸方向について積層された4枚により構成される組が、Y軸方向について背中合わせ状に配されるとともに、全体として一対の光源ユニット2Uに挟み込まれる形で配されている。従って、バックライト装置212全体の発光面は、各導光部材219が有する各光出射面219aによって64個の領域にマトリクス状に区分されている。このような構成とすれば、バックライト装置212の大型化により好適となる。 Referring to FIGS. 15 and 16, a pair of light source units 2U according to the present embodiment are arranged at both ends of the long side of the chassis 214. Specifically, a predetermined interval is provided between the long side plates 214b on the long side of the chassis 214 and the light guide member 219, and the light source units 2U are arranged in the spaces. The LED 217, the LED substrate 218, the condenser lens 221, the polygon mirror 222, and the synchronization detection unit 223 constituting each light source unit 2U are arranged in a point symmetry with the center position of the light guide member 219 as a symmetric point. On the other hand, the light guide member 219 is configured such that a set of four stacked in the Z-axis direction is arranged back-to-back in the Y-axis direction and sandwiched between the pair of light source units 2U as a whole. It is arranged. Therefore, the light emitting surface of the entire backlight device 212 is divided into 64 regions in a matrix form by the light emitting surfaces 219a of the light guide members 219. Such a configuration is more suitable for increasing the size of the backlight device 212.
 <実施形態4>
 本発明の実施形態4を図17から図19によって説明する。この実施形態4では、上記した実施形態3から導光部材319の設置数及び配置をさらに変更したものを示す。なお、上記した実施形態3と同様の構造、作用及び効果について重複する説明は省略する。
<Embodiment 4>
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In this Embodiment 4, what changed further the installation number and arrangement | positioning of the light guide member 319 from above-mentioned Embodiment 3 is shown. In addition, the overlapping description about the same structure, effect | action, and effect as above-mentioned Embodiment 3 is abbreviate | omitted.
 本実施形態に係る導光部材319は、図17から図19に示すように、X軸方向について分割された8個の分割導光部材319Sから構成されるとともに、4枚の分割導光部材319Sを積層してなる組がX軸方向について隣り合うもの同士でY軸方向について反転したような配置とされている。詳しくは、4枚の分割導光部材319Sを積層してなる組には、2種類のものが存在しており、一方の組は、図18に示すように、各分割導光部材319Sを同図左側(図17では下側)に寄せて配したものであり、他方の組は、図19に示すように、各分割導光部材319を同図右側(図17では上側)に寄せて配したものである。本実施形態では、X軸方向について隣り合う組が、上記した一方の組と他方の組となるよう、各組の分割導光部材319SをY軸方向について反転して配列している。具体的には、図17に示す左端から数えて奇数番目の組をなす各分割導光部材319SA,319SC,319SE,319SGは、図18に示すように、同図左側に寄せて配されており、各分割光入射面319bSが同図左側を向いた形で配されている。これに対し、図17に示す左端から数えて偶数番目の組をなす各導光部材319SB,319SD,319SF,319SHは、図19に示すように、同図右側に寄せて配されており、各分割光入射面319bSが同図右側を向いた形で配されている。 As shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the light guide member 319 according to this embodiment includes eight divided light guide members 319 </ b> S divided in the X-axis direction, and four divided light guide members 319 </ b> S. Are arranged in such a manner that a pair formed by stacking layers is adjacent to each other in the X-axis direction and reversed in the Y-axis direction. Specifically, there are two types of groups in which the four divided light guide members 319S are stacked, and one group has the same divided light guide members 319S as shown in FIG. In the other set, as shown in FIG. 19, the divided light guide members 319 are arranged near the right side (upper side in FIG. 17). It is a thing. In this embodiment, the divided light guide members 319 </ b> S of each set are reversed and arranged in the Y-axis direction so that the sets adjacent to each other in the X-axis direction are the above-described one set and the other set. Specifically, each of the divided light guide members 319SA, 319SC, 319SE, and 319SG forming an odd-numbered set counted from the left end shown in FIG. 17 is arranged close to the left side of the figure as shown in FIG. The split light incident surfaces 319bS are arranged facing the left side of the figure. On the other hand, the light guide members 319SB, 319SD, 319SF, and 319SH that form even-numbered pairs counted from the left end shown in FIG. 17 are arranged close to the right side of the figure as shown in FIG. The split light incident surface 319bS is arranged so as to face the right side of the figure.
 上記のような配置とされた導光部材319に対して光を供給する一対の光源ユニット3Uは、制御部25(図6参照)によって以下のように制御される。なお、以下では、図17に示す下側の光源ユニット3Uを「第1光源ユニット」として符号に添え字Aを付すのに対し、同図上側の光源ユニット3Uを「第2光源ユニット」として符号に添え字Bを付すものとする。すなわち、各分割導光部材319Sのうち、奇数番目の分割導光部材319SA,319SC,319SE,319SGにおける各分割光入射面319bSについては、第1光源ユニット3UAをなすポリゴンミラー322からの反射光により走査するのに対し、偶数番目の分割導光部材319SB,319SD,319SF,319SHにおける各分割光入射面319bSについては、第2光源ユニット3UBをなすポリゴンミラー322からの反射光により走査するよう、制御部25により制御することができる。このようにすれば、各光源ユニット3Uによる反射光が分割光入射面319bSを走査する走査期間の間に、分割光入射面319bSを走査しない非走査期間を有することになり、その非走査期間に、隣り合う分割導光部材319S間の空気層ASを走査し得る僅かな期間(非走査期間)を連続させることができるので、各LED317の発光状態をより容易に制御することができる。 The pair of light source units 3U that supply light to the light guide member 319 arranged as described above is controlled by the control unit 25 (see FIG. 6) as follows. In the following description, the lower light source unit 3U shown in FIG. 17 is referred to as a “first light source unit”, and a suffix A is added to the reference numeral, whereas the upper light source unit 3U is referred to as a “second light source unit”. Subscript B shall be attached. That is, among the divided light guide members 319S, the divided light incident surfaces 319bS in the odd-numbered divided light guide members 319SA, 319SC, 319SE, and 319SG are reflected by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 322 forming the first light source unit 3UA. In contrast to the scanning, the divided light incident surfaces 319bS in the even-numbered divided light guide members 319SB, 319SD, 319SF, and 319SH are controlled to be scanned by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 322 forming the second light source unit 3UB. It can be controlled by the unit 25. In this way, there is a non-scanning period in which the divided light incident surface 319bS is not scanned during the scanning period in which the reflected light from each light source unit 3U scans the divided light incident surface 319bS. Since a slight period (non-scanning period) during which the air layer AS between the adjacent divided light guide members 319S can be scanned can be continued, the light emission state of each LED 317 can be controlled more easily.
 <実施形態5>
 本発明の実施形態5を図20または図21によって説明する。この実施形態5では、上記した実施形態1から、光源ユニット4Uの配置及び導光部材419の積層枚数及び分割態様を変更したものを示す。なお、上記した実施形態1と同様の構造、作用及び効果について重複する説明は省略する。
<Embodiment 5>
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 20 or FIG. This Embodiment 5 shows what changed arrangement | positioning of the light source unit 4U, the number of lamination | stacking of the light guide member 419, and the division | segmentation aspect from above-mentioned Embodiment 1. FIG. In addition, the overlapping description about the same structure, an effect | action, and effect as above-mentioned Embodiment 1 is abbreviate | omitted.
 光源ユニット4Uは、図20に示すように、シャーシ414における短辺側の一端部に配されている。詳しくは、光源ユニット4Uは、シャーシ414における図20に示す右側の短辺側の側板414cと導光部材419との間に配されている。光源ユニット4UをなすLED基板418及び同期検知部423は、図20に示す下側の長辺側の側板414bに取り付けられている。集光レンズ421は、ポリゴンミラー422よりもLED417に近くなる位置に配されている。ポリゴンミラー422は、導光部材419における全体の短辺方向(Y軸方向、後述する反射光による走査方向)についてほぼ中央位置に配されている。ポリゴンミラー422は、図20に示す時計回り方向(矢線方向)に回転するものとされる。 The light source unit 4U is disposed at one end of the short side of the chassis 414 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the light source unit 4U is disposed between the light guide member 419 and the side plate 414c on the right short side of the chassis 414 shown in FIG. The LED board 418 and the synchronization detection unit 423 constituting the light source unit 4U are attached to the lower side plate 414b on the lower side shown in FIG. The condenser lens 421 is arranged at a position closer to the LED 417 than the polygon mirror 422. The polygon mirror 422 is disposed at a substantially central position in the entire short side direction of the light guide member 419 (Y-axis direction, scanning direction by reflected light described later). The polygon mirror 422 is rotated in the clockwise direction (arrow line direction) shown in FIG.
 導光部材419のうち、全体の短辺方向(Y軸方向)に沿った両側面のうち、上記した光源ユニット4Uとの対向面が光入射面419bとされている。光入射面419bは、光源ユニット4Uをなすポリゴンミラー422からの反射光によってY軸方向に沿って図20に示す下側から上側へ向けて直線的に走査されるようになっている。導光部材419は、全体の長辺方向(X軸方向)に沿って分断するような形で、短辺方向(Y軸方向、ポリゴンミラー422からの反射光による走査方向)について6つの分割導光部材419Sに分割されており、その分割幅はほぼ等しいものとされる。各分割導光部材419Sが有する各分割光入射面419bSには、発光状態が時分割制御されたLED417からの光がポリゴンミラー422を介してそれぞれ入射されるようになっている。さらには、この導光部材419は、図21に示すように、Z軸方向について6枚が積層されている。なお、6枚の導光部材419における積層構造は、枚数が増加した点を除いては上記した実施形態1に記載したものと同様であるため、重複する説明は割愛する。なお、LED417は、導光部材419の積層枚数と同数(6個)が、Z軸方向に沿って並列して配されている。 Among the light guide members 419, of the both side surfaces along the entire short side direction (Y-axis direction), the surface facing the light source unit 4U is a light incident surface 419b. The light incident surface 419b is linearly scanned from the lower side to the upper side shown in FIG. 20 along the Y-axis direction by the reflected light from the polygon mirror 422 constituting the light source unit 4U. The light guide member 419 is divided along the entire long side direction (X-axis direction), and is divided into six divided guides in the short side direction (Y-axis direction, the scanning direction by reflected light from the polygon mirror 422). It is divided into optical members 419S, and the divided widths are substantially equal. Light from the LED 417 whose light emission state is controlled in a time-sharing manner is incident on each split light incident surface 419bS of each split light guide member 419S via a polygon mirror 422. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21, six light guide members 419 are laminated in the Z-axis direction. Note that the laminated structure of the six light guide members 419 is the same as that described in the first embodiment except that the number of the light guide members 419 is increased, and thus a redundant description is omitted. Note that the LED 417 is arranged in parallel in the Z-axis direction in the same number (six) as the number of the light guide members 419 stacked.
 <実施形態6>
 本発明の実施形態6を図22によって説明する。この実施形態6では、上記した実施形態5に記載した光源ユニット5Uを一対設けたものを示す。なお、上記した実施形態1と同様の構造、作用及び効果について重複する説明は省略する。
<Embodiment 6>
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the sixth embodiment, a pair of light source units 5U described in the fifth embodiment is provided. In addition, the overlapping description about the same structure, an effect | action, and effect as above-mentioned Embodiment 1 is abbreviate | omitted.
 本実施形態に係る光源ユニット5Uは、図22に示すように、シャーシ514における短辺側の両端部に一対配されている。詳しくは、シャーシ514における短辺側の両側板514cと導光部材519との間には、それぞれ所定の間隔が空けられており、その空間にそれぞれ光源ユニット5Uが配されている。各光源ユニット5Uを構成するLED517、LED基板518、集光レンズ521、ポリゴンミラー522及び同期検知部523は、導光部材519の中心位置を対称点とした点対称となる配置とされている。これに対し、導光部材519は、Z軸方向について積層された4枚により構成される組が、X軸方向について背中合わせ状に配されるとともに、全体として一対の光源ユニット5Uに挟み込まれる形で配されている。従って、バックライト装置512全体の発光面は、各導光部材519が有する各光出射面519aによって48個の領域にマトリクス状に区分されている。このような構成とすれば、バックライト装置512の大型化により好適となる。 Referring to FIG. 22, a pair of light source units 5U according to the present embodiment are arranged at both ends on the short side of the chassis 514. Specifically, a predetermined interval is provided between the short-side side plates 514c and the light guide member 519 in the chassis 514, and the light source units 5U are disposed in the spaces. The LED 517, the LED substrate 518, the condenser lens 521, the polygon mirror 522, and the synchronization detection unit 523 that constitute each light source unit 5U are arranged in a point symmetry with the center position of the light guide member 519 as a symmetric point. On the other hand, the light guide member 519 is configured such that a set of four stacked in the Z-axis direction is arranged back-to-back in the X-axis direction and sandwiched between the pair of light source units 5U as a whole. It is arranged. Therefore, the light emitting surface of the entire backlight device 512 is divided into 48 regions in a matrix by each light emitting surface 519a of each light guide member 519. Such a configuration is suitable for increasing the size of the backlight device 512.
 <実施形態7>
 本発明の実施形態7を図23によって説明する。この実施形態7では、上記した実施形態1に記載したポリゴンミラー22に代えてガルバノミラー29を用いたものを示す。なお、上記した実施形態1と同様の構造、作用及び効果について重複する説明は省略する。
<Embodiment 7>
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, a galvanometer mirror 29 is used in place of the polygon mirror 22 described in the first embodiment. In addition, the overlapping description about the same structure, an effect | action, and effect as above-mentioned Embodiment 1 is abbreviate | omitted.
 ガルバノミラー29は、図23に示すように、横長な板状をなすとともに導光部材19側を向いた面が反射面29bとされており、回動軸29a周りに回動可能とされている。詳しくは、ガルバノミラー29は、回動軸29a周りに図23に示す矢線方向に往復揺動されるようになっており、それに伴って集光レンズ21からガルバノミラー29に向かう光に対してなす反射面29bの角度が時分割的に変化されるとともに、反射面29bによって反射された光の進行方向が時分割的に変化するものとされる。そして、ガルバノミラー29による反射光は、ガルバノミラー29の回動に伴って、導光部材19(分割導光部材19S)の光入射面19b(分割光入射面19bS)をその長辺方向(X軸方向)に沿って図16に示す左側から右側へ向けて直線的に走査することが可能とされる。
 なお、往復揺動する回動反射体の他の例としては、レゾナントミラーを挙げることができ、これを上記したガルバノミラー29に代えて用いることも可能である。
As shown in FIG. 23, the galvanometer mirror 29 has a horizontally long plate shape and a surface facing the light guide member 19 side as a reflection surface 29b, and is rotatable around a rotation shaft 29a. . Specifically, the galvanometer mirror 29 is reciprocally swung around the rotation axis 29a in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. The angle of the reflection surface 29b is changed in a time division manner, and the traveling direction of the light reflected by the reflection surface 29b is changed in a time division manner. Then, the reflected light from the galvanometer mirror 29 causes the light incident surface 19b (divided light incident surface 19bS) of the light guide member 19 (divided light guide member 19S) to move in the long side direction (X It is possible to scan linearly from the left side to the right side shown in FIG.
In addition, as another example of the rotating reflector that reciprocally swings, a resonant mirror can be cited, which can be used in place of the galvano mirror 29 described above.
 <他の実施形態>
 本発明は上記記述及び図面によって説明した実施形態に限定されるものではなく、例えば次のような実施形態も本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。
 (1)上記した各実施形態では、各導光部材が複数に分割されたものを示したが、導光部材を分割しない構成としたものも本発明に含まれる。具体的には、図24に示すように、各導光部材19A′~19D′をそれぞれ1枚ものとすることが可能であり、その場合でも、各光入射面19b′のうち同図一点鎖線にて区分した各領域に対するポリゴンミラー22からの反射光の走査期間毎に、LED17の発光状態を時分割して制御するようにすればよい。
<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described with reference to the above description and drawings. For example, the following embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the light guide member is divided into a plurality of parts. However, the present invention includes a structure in which the light guide member is not divided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, each of the light guide members 19A ′ to 19D ′ can be made one, and even in that case, the light-incident surface 19b ′ of FIG. The light emission state of the LED 17 may be controlled in a time-sharing manner for each scanning period of the reflected light from the polygon mirror 22 for each region divided by.
 (2)上記した実施形態1から実施形態6では、ポリゴンミラーが回転軸に沿う方向から視て正方形とされたものを示したが、例えば、図25に示すように、回転軸22a′に沿う方向から視て正六角形とされるポリゴンミラー22′を用いることも可能である。 (2) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the polygon mirror is shown to be square when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the polygon mirror is along the rotation axis 22a ′. It is also possible to use a polygon mirror 22 ′ that is a regular hexagon when viewed from the direction.
 (3)上記した(2)以外にも、ポリゴンミラーにおける回転軸に沿う方向から視た形状は、例えば正三角形、正五角形、正七角形、正八角形などの他の正多角形とすることも可能である。 (3) In addition to the above (2), the shape of the polygon mirror viewed from the direction along the rotation axis may be other regular polygons such as a regular triangle, a regular pentagon, a regular heptagon, and a regular octagon. It is.
 (4)上記した(3)以外にも、ポリゴンミラーにおける回転軸に沿う方向から視た形状は、例えば二等辺三角形や台形などの非正多角形とすることも可能である。 (4) In addition to the above (3), the shape of the polygon mirror viewed from the direction along the rotation axis may be a non-regular polygon such as an isosceles triangle or a trapezoid.
 (5)上記した各実施形態では、回動反射体としてポリゴンミラー、ガルバノミラー、レゾナントミラーを例示したが、これら以外の、MEMS(Micro Electro Mechanical System)技術を用いた回動反射体を用いることも可能である。 (5) In each embodiment described above, a polygon mirror, a galvano mirror, and a resonant mirror are exemplified as the rotating reflector. However, other rotating reflectors using MEMS (Micro Electro Mechanical System) technology are used. Is also possible.
 (6)上記した各実施形態では、導光部材の積層枚数とLEDの設置数とが一致するものを示したが、必ずしも両者を一致させる必要はなく、例えば導光部材の積層枚数に比べてLEDの設置数が少ないものや、逆に多くなるものも本発明に含まれる。 (6) In the above-described embodiments, the number of laminated light guide members and the number of installed LEDs are shown to be the same. However, it is not always necessary to match both, for example, compared to the number of laminated light guide members. Those having a small number of installed LEDs and those having a large number are also included in the present invention.
 (7)上記した各実施形態では、各段のLED(第1LED~第4LED)がそれぞれ1つずつ設けられたものを示したが、各段のLEDを複数ずつ設けるようにしたものも本発明に含まれる。このようにすれば、輝度の向上を図ることができる。なお、各段における複数のLEDからの光は、集光レンズの光学設計を変更することで、ポリゴンミラーに対して効率的に集光しつつ照射することが可能である。 (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, one LED is provided for each stage (first LED to fourth LED). However, the present invention is also provided with a plurality of LEDs for each stage. include. In this way, the luminance can be improved. It should be noted that light from a plurality of LEDs in each stage can be irradiated while efficiently condensing the polygon mirror by changing the optical design of the condenser lens.
 (8)上記した各実施形態では、導光部材を4枚または6枚積層するようにしたものを示したが、導光部材の積層枚数は、4枚、6枚以外にも適宜に変更することができる。導光部材の積層枚数を変更した場合には、積層方向に並ぶLEDの設置数についても導光部材の積層枚数と同じになるよう変更するのが好ましい。 (8) In the above-described embodiments, four or six light guide members are stacked. However, the number of light guide members stacked is appropriately changed to other than four or six. be able to. When the number of light guide members stacked is changed, it is preferable that the number of LEDs arranged in the stacking direction is also changed to be the same as the number of light guide members stacked.
 (9)上記した各実施形態では、積層された各導光部材における光入射面同士が面一状をなす配置としたものを示したが、積層された各導光部材における光入射面が面一状をなさない配置としたものも本発明に含まれる。その場合には、ポリゴンミラーの反射面の形状またはLEDの配置を変更することで、各段のLEDから発せられた光が光入射面に到達するまでの光路長を等しくするのが好ましい。 (9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the light incident surfaces of the stacked light guide members are arranged so that they are flush with each other. However, the light incident surfaces of the stacked light guide members are surfaces. What was made into the arrangement | positioning which does not form one shape is also contained in this invention. In that case, it is preferable to make the optical path lengths until the light emitted from the LEDs of each stage reaches the light incident surface by changing the shape of the reflecting surface of the polygon mirror or the arrangement of the LEDs.
 (10)上記した各実施形態では、制御部によりLEDの発光状態をPWM制御するものを示したが、他の手法によりLEDの発光状態を制御することも勿論可能である。例えば、LEDを駆動する駆動電圧を時分割的に変動させることで、LEDの発光状態を時分割制御することも可能である。 (10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the control unit performs PWM control of the light emission state of the LED, but it is of course possible to control the LED light emission state by other methods. For example, the light emission state of the LED can be controlled in a time-sharing manner by changing the drive voltage for driving the LED in a time-sharing manner.
 (11)上記した各実施形態では、同期検知部によってポリゴンミラー(ガルバノミラー)の回転状態(回動状態)にLEDの発光状態を同期させるようにした場合を示したが、この同期検知部を省略することも可能である。その場合、例えばポリゴンミラーを回転駆動するための電磁モータにセンサを設けてその回転状態を直接検出するようにし、その検出信号に基づいてLEDの発光状態を制御部により制御するようにすればよい。 (11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the light emission state of the LED is synchronized with the rotation state (rotation state) of the polygon mirror (galvano mirror) by the synchronization detection unit has been described. It can be omitted. In that case, for example, a sensor is provided in an electromagnetic motor for rotationally driving the polygon mirror so that the rotation state is directly detected, and the light emission state of the LED is controlled by the control unit based on the detection signal. .
 (12)上記した各実施形態では、導光部材における分割幅、つまり各分割導光部材における走査方向についての寸法をほぼ均等にした場合を示したが、導光部材における分割幅を異ならせる設定とすることも可能である。 (12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the division width in the light guide member, that is, the case where the dimensions in the scanning direction in each division light guide member are substantially equalized, but the division width in the light guide member is set to be different. It is also possible.
 (13)上記した各実施形態では、各導光部材を6つまたは8つに分割したものを示したが、各導光部材の分割数は、6つ、8つ以外にも適宜に変更することができる。 (13) In each of the above-described embodiments, each light guide member is divided into six or eight. However, the number of divisions of each light guide member is appropriately changed to other than six and eight. be able to.
 (14)上記した実施形態1では、シャーシの短辺側の両側板のうち、図3に示す左側の側板にLED基板及び同期検知部を取り付けたものを示したが、その反対側(図3に示す右側)の側板にLED基板及び同期検知部を取り付けるようにしても勿論構わない。 (14) In the first embodiment described above, among the two side plates on the short side of the chassis, the left side plate shown in FIG. 3 is attached with the LED substrate and the synchronization detection unit. Of course, it does not matter if the LED substrate and the synchronization detection unit are attached to the side plate on the right side.
 (15)上記した実施形態5では、シャーシの長辺側の両側板のうち、図20に示す下側の側板にLED基板及び同期検知部を取り付けたものを示したが、その反対側(図20に示す上側)の側板にLED基板及び同期検知部を取り付けるようにしても勿論構わない。 (15) In the fifth embodiment described above, among the both side plates on the long side of the chassis, the lower side plate shown in FIG. 20 is attached with the LED substrate and the synchronization detection unit. Of course, the LED board and the synchronization detection unit may be attached to the upper side plate shown in FIG.
 (16)上記した各実施形態では、LED基板をシャーシの側板に取り付けるものを示したが、例えば断面L字型をなす放熱板を用意し、その放熱板にLED基板を取り付けるとともに放熱板をシャーシの底板に取り付けるようにしても構わない。 (16) In the above-described embodiments, the LED board is attached to the side plate of the chassis. For example, a heat sink having an L-shaped cross section is prepared, the LED board is attached to the heat sink, and the heat sink is attached to the chassis. It may be attached to the bottom plate.
 (17)上記した各実施形態では、シャーシ内に光源ユニットを1つまたは2つ配したものを示したが、シャーシ内に光源ユニットを3つまたは4つ配するようにしたものも本発明に含まれる。 (17) In each of the above-described embodiments, one or two light source units are arranged in the chassis, but three or four light source units are arranged in the chassis. included.
 (18)上記した各実施形態では、LED、集光レンズ及びポリゴンミラー(ガルバノミラー)の並び方向と、ポリゴンミラー(ガルバノミラー)及び導光部材の並び方向とが直交する配置とされたものを例示したが、上記した両並び方向が90度以上の角度(鈍角)をなす設定や、90度以下の角度(鋭角)をなす設定とすることも可能である。その場合でも、集光レンズによって集光された光の進行方向は、LED及びポリゴンミラー(ガルバノミラー)の並び方向と一致する設定とするのが好ましい。 (18) In each of the above-described embodiments, an arrangement in which the alignment direction of the LED, the condenser lens, and the polygon mirror (galvano mirror) is orthogonal to the alignment direction of the polygon mirror (galvano mirror) and the light guide member is used. Although illustrated, it is also possible to set the above-described two alignment directions to make an angle of 90 degrees or more (obtuse angle) or to make an angle of 90 degrees or less (acute angle). Even in that case, it is preferable that the traveling direction of the light condensed by the condenser lens is set to coincide with the arrangement direction of the LED and the polygon mirror (galvano mirror).
 (19)上記した各実施形態では、ポリゴンミラー(ガルバノミラー)が光入射面における走査方向についてのほぼ中央位置に配されたものを示したが、ポリゴンミラー(ガルバノミラー)が上記中央位置からずれた配置とされたものも本発明に含まれる。 (19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the polygon mirror (galvano mirror) is arranged at the substantially central position in the scanning direction on the light incident surface. However, the polygon mirror (galvano mirror) is displaced from the central position. What was made into the arrangement | positioning was also included in this invention.
 (20)上記した各実施形態では、LEDが光入射面における走査方向についての端となる位置に配されたものを示したが、LEDが光入射面における走査方向における端となる位置よりも中央寄りに配置されたものも本発明に含まれる。 (20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the LED is arranged at the position that is the end in the scanning direction on the light incident surface. Those arranged close to each other are also included in the present invention.
 (21)上記した各実施形態では、同期検知部が、LED基板と同じ側板に取り付けられるとともに、LEDと導光部材との間となる位置に配されたものを示したが、例えば同期検知部をLED基板とは異なる側板(例えば反対側の側板)に取り付けることも可能である。さらには、同期検知部をLED基板と同じ側板に取り付けつつも、導光部材との間でLEDを挟むような位置に配することも可能である。 (21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the synchronization detection unit is attached to the same side plate as the LED substrate and is disposed at a position between the LED and the light guide member. Can be attached to a side plate (for example, the opposite side plate) different from the LED substrate. Furthermore, it is also possible to place the synchronization detection unit on the same side plate as the LED substrate, and arrange the LED between the light guide member and the LED.
 (22)上記した各実施形態では、隣り合う分割導光部材間に介在する低屈折率層として空気層を利用したものを示したが、低屈折率材料からなる低屈折率層を用いることも可能である。 (22) In each of the above embodiments, the air layer is used as the low refractive index layer interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members. However, a low refractive index layer made of a low refractive index material may be used. Is possible.
 (23)上記した各実施形態では、隣り合う分割導光部材間に空気層を介在させたものを示したが、空気層に代えて光反射性に優れた反射シートなどからなる反射層を用いることも可能である。 (23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the air layer is interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members. However, instead of the air layer, a reflective layer made of a reflective sheet having excellent light reflectivity is used. It is also possible.
 (24)上記した各実施形態では、集光部材として集光レンズを用いた場合を示したが、レンズ以外の集光部材を用いることも可能である。 (24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the condensing lens is used as the condensing member is shown, but a condensing member other than the lens may be used.
 (25)上記した各実施形態では、光源としてLEDを用いた場合を示したが、他の種類の光源(冷陰極管、熱陰極管、レーザー光源など)を用いることも勿論可能である。 (25) In each of the above-described embodiments, the LED is used as the light source. However, other types of light sources (cold cathode tube, hot cathode tube, laser light source, etc.) can of course be used.
 (26)上記した各実施形態では、液晶パネルにおける1枚の表示画像の表示期間の具体例として、1/60秒や1/120秒としたものを示したが、1/180秒や1/240秒などに変更することも可能であり、それに応じて回動反射体の反射光による光入射面に対する走査期間を変更すればよい。なお、上記した表示期間の具体的な数値は上記以外にも適宜変更可能である。 (26) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the display period of one display image on the liquid crystal panel is 1/60 seconds or 1/120 seconds. It is also possible to change to 240 seconds or the like, and the scanning period for the light incident surface by the reflected light of the rotating reflector may be changed accordingly. In addition, the specific numerical value of the above-described display period can be appropriately changed in addition to the above.
 (27)上記した実施形態3及び実施形態6では、一対の光源ユニットにおける各LED基板及び各同期検知部が互いに異なる側板に取り付けられたものを示したが、これらを同じ側板に取り付けるようにしたものも本発明に含まれる。その場合、一方の光源ユニットをなすポリゴンミラーと、他方の光源ユニットをなすポリゴンミラーとで回転方向が逆向きになるよう設定すればよい。 (27) In Embodiment 3 and Embodiment 6 described above, the LED substrates and the synchronization detection units in the pair of light source units are attached to different side plates, but these are attached to the same side plate. Are also included in the present invention. In that case, the polygon mirror that forms one light source unit and the polygon mirror that forms the other light source unit may be set so that the rotation directions are opposite.
 (28)上記した各実施形態では、第1導光部材~第3導光部材の底面と、この底面を受ける第2導光部材~第4導光部材の支持面とが互いに並行するものを示したが、上記した底面と支持面とが互いに並行しない形態としたものも本発明に含まれる。 (28) In each of the above embodiments, the bottom surfaces of the first light guide member to the third light guide member and the support surfaces of the second light guide member to the fourth light guide member that receive the bottom surface are parallel to each other. Although shown, the present invention includes a configuration in which the bottom surface and the support surface are not parallel to each other.
 (29)上記した各実施形態では、互いに積層される導光部材における各光出射面が全て同じ面積とされたものを示したが、互いに積層される導光部材における各光出射面の面積が部分的に或いは全て異なる設定とすることも可能である。 (29) In each of the above-described embodiments, the light output surfaces of the light guide members stacked on each other are shown to have the same area. However, the areas of the light output surfaces of the light guide members stacked on each other are Partially or entirely different settings are possible.
 (30)上記した各実施形態では、互いに積層される導光部材の幅寸法が全て同一とされるものを示したが、互いに積層される導光部材の幅寸法が部分的に或いは全て異なる設定とすることも可能である。 (30) In the above-described embodiments, the width dimensions of the light guide members stacked on each other are the same, but the width dimensions of the light guide members stacked on each other are set to be partially or completely different. It is also possible.
 (31)上記した各実施形態では、導光部材の積層方向に沿って並ぶLEDが直線的に整列する配置としたものを示したが、導光部材の積層方向に沿って並ぶLEDがX軸方向またはY軸方向にずれた配置とされるものも本発明に含まれる。 (31) In each of the above-described embodiments, the LEDs arranged along the light guide member stacking direction are linearly arranged. However, the LEDs aligned along the light guide member stacking direction are arranged in the X axis. Those that are displaced in the direction or the Y-axis direction are also included in the present invention.
 (32)上記した各実施形態では、導光部材の底面に沿って配される反射シートが光入射面とは反対側の面までをも覆う形の1枚ものとされる場合を示したが、反射シートを2枚構成とし、導光部材の底面を覆うものと、導光部材の光入射面とは反対側の面を覆うものとに分けるようにしたものも本発明に含まれる。 (32) In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the reflection sheet arranged along the bottom surface of the light guide member is a single sheet covering the surface opposite to the light incident surface is shown. Also, the present invention includes a configuration in which two reflection sheets are configured and divided into one that covers the bottom surface of the light guide member and one that covers the surface opposite to the light incident surface of the light guide member.
 (33)上記した各実施形態では、反射シートが裏側に積層される導光部材における支持面を全域にわたって覆うものを示したが、反射シートが裏側に積層される導光部材における支持面を部分的に覆う形態とされたものも本発明に含まれる。 (33) In each of the above-described embodiments, the reflection sheet covers the entire support surface of the light guide member laminated on the back side, but the support surface of the light guide member on which the reflection sheet is laminated on the back side is partially What was made into the form covered automatically is also contained in this invention.
 (34)上記した各実施形態では、反射シートが導光部材の底面に加えて光入射面とは反対側の面までをも覆う形態とされたものを示したが、反射シートが導光部材の底面のみを覆い、光入射面とは反対側の面については覆うことがない形態とすることも可能である。 (34) In each of the above-described embodiments, the reflection sheet is configured to cover the surface opposite to the light incident surface in addition to the bottom surface of the light guide member. It is also possible to adopt a form in which only the bottom surface of the light incident surface is covered and the surface opposite to the light incident surface is not covered.
 (35)上記した各実施形態では、液晶パネルがその短辺方向を鉛直方向と一致させた縦置き状態とされるものを例示したが、液晶パネルがその長辺方向を鉛直方向と一致させた縦置き状態とされるものも本発明に含まれる。 (35) In each of the above-described embodiments, the liquid crystal panel is illustrated in a vertically placed state in which the short side direction coincides with the vertical direction, but the liquid crystal panel matches the long side direction with the vertical direction. What is set in a vertical state is also included in the present invention.
 (36)上記した実施形態では、液晶表示装置のスイッチング素子としてTFTを用いたが、TFT以外のスイッチング素子(例えば薄膜ダイオード(TFD))を用いた液晶表示装置にも適用可能であり、カラー表示する液晶表示装置以外にも、白黒表示する液晶表示装置にも適用可能である。 (36) In the above-described embodiment, the TFT is used as the switching element of the liquid crystal display device. However, the present invention can also be applied to a liquid crystal display device using a switching element other than the TFT (for example, a thin film diode (TFD)), and color display. In addition to the liquid crystal display device, the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device that displays black and white.
 (37)上記した各実施形態では、表示パネルとして液晶パネルを用いた液晶表示装置を例示したが、他の種類の表示パネルを用いた表示装置にも本発明は適用可能である。 (37) In each of the above-described embodiments, the liquid crystal display device using the liquid crystal panel as the display panel has been exemplified. However, the present invention can be applied to display devices using other types of display panels.
 (38)上記した各実施形態では、チューナーを備えたテレビ受信装置を例示したが、チューナーを備えない表示装置にも本発明は適用可能である。 (38) In each of the above-described embodiments, the television receiver provided with the tuner is exemplified, but the present invention is also applicable to a display device not provided with the tuner.
 10…液晶表示装置(表示装置)、11…液晶パネル(表示パネル)、12,212,512…バックライト装置(照明装置)、17,117,217,317,418…LED(光源)、19,119,219,319,419,519…導光部材、19A,119A…第1導光部材、19B,119B…第2導光部材(第1導光部材)、19C,119C…第3導光部材(第1導光部材、第2導光部材)、19D,119D…第4導光部材(第2導光部材)、19S,319S,419S…分割導光部材19a,119a,219a,519a…光出射面、19b,119b,419b…光入射面、19bS,319bS,419bS…分割光入射面(領域)、19c,119c…底面、19d…面、19e,119e…支持面、20,120…反射シート(反射部材)、21,221,421,521…集光レンズ(集光部材)、22,222,322,422,522…ポリゴンミラー(回動反射体)、22a…回転軸(軸)、22b,29b…反射面(面)、25…制御部、27…突出出光部、28…傾斜面、29…ガルバノミラー(回動反射体)、AS…空気層(低屈折率層)、TV…テレビ受信装置 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Liquid crystal display device (display device), 11 ... Liquid crystal panel (display panel), 12, 212, 512 ... Backlight device (illumination device), 17, 117, 217, 317, 418 ... LED (light source), 19, 119, 219, 319, 419, 519 ... light guide member, 19A, 119A ... first light guide member, 19B, 119B ... second light guide member (first light guide member), 19C, 119C ... third light guide member (1st light guide member, 2nd light guide member), 19D, 119D ... 4th light guide member (2nd light guide member), 19S, 319S, 419S ... division | segmentation light guide member 19a, 119a, 219a, 519a ... light Output surface, 19b, 119b, 419b ... light incident surface, 19bS, 319bS, 419bS ... split light incident surface (region), 19c, 119c ... bottom surface, 19d ... surface, 19e, 119e ... support surface, 20 120 ... reflective sheet (reflective member) 21,221,421,521 ... condensing lens (condensing member) 22,222,322,422,522 ... polygon mirror (rotating reflector), 22a ... rotating shaft ( Axis), 22b, 29b ... reflecting surface (surface), 25 ... control unit, 27 ... projecting light exiting portion, 28 ... tilted surface, 29 ... galvanomirror (rotating reflector), AS ... air layer (low refractive index layer) , TV ... TV receiver

Claims (29)

  1.  光が入射される光入射面と、入射した光を出射させる光出射面とを有するとともに、互いの前記光出射面同士が前記光入射面側から視た奥行き方向について隣り合う形となるよう積層して配される複数の導光部材と、
     前記導光部材の積層方向に沿って並んで配される複数の光源と、
     前記導光部材の積層方向に沿った軸周りに回動されつつ前記光源からの光を反射し、その反射光により前記光入射面を走査する回動反射体と、
     前記光入射面を前記回動反射体からの前記反射光による走査方向について複数の領域に区分したとき、各領域に対する前記反射光の走査期間に対応付けて前記光源の発光状態を時分割して制御する制御部とを備える照明装置。
    Stacked so as to have a light incident surface on which light is incident and a light emitting surface for emitting incident light, and the light emitting surfaces are adjacent to each other in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side. A plurality of light guide members arranged as
    A plurality of light sources arranged side by side along the stacking direction of the light guide members;
    A rotating reflector that reflects light from the light source while being rotated about an axis along the stacking direction of the light guide member, and scans the light incident surface with the reflected light; and
    When the light incident surface is divided into a plurality of regions in the scanning direction by the reflected light from the rotating reflector, the light emission state of the light source is time-divided in association with the reflected light scanning period for each region. An illuminating device provided with the control part to control.
  2.  積層される前記導光部材の数と、前記導光部材の積層方向に沿って並んで配される前記光源の数とが一致している請求項1記載の照明装置。 The illuminating device according to claim 1, wherein the number of the light guide members to be laminated matches the number of the light sources arranged side by side in the lamination direction of the light guide members.
  3.  前記光源及び前記回動反射体の並び方向と、前記回動反射体及び前記導光部材の並び方向とが互いに略直交するものとされる請求項1または請求項2記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein an arrangement direction of the light source and the rotating reflector and an arrangement direction of the rotating reflector and the light guide member are substantially orthogonal to each other.
  4.  前記回動反射体は、前記走査方向について前記光入射面のほぼ中央位置に配されている請求項1から請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the rotating reflector is disposed at a substantially central position of the light incident surface in the scanning direction.
  5.  前記光源は、前記走査方向について前記光入射面の端側に配されている請求項1から請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The illuminating device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the light source is disposed on an end side of the light incident surface in the scanning direction.
  6.  前記光入射面における前記複数の領域は、前記走査方向についての寸法が互いにほぼ同じとなるよう区分されている請求項1から請求項5のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the plurality of regions on the light incident surface are partitioned so that dimensions in the scanning direction are substantially the same.
  7.  前記回動反射体は、一方向に回転するポリゴンミラーにより構成されている請求項1から請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The illumination device according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the rotating reflector is configured by a polygon mirror that rotates in one direction.
  8.  前記ポリゴンミラーは、その回転軸に沿う方向から視た平面形状が正多角形とされる請求項7記載の照明装置。 The illumination device according to claim 7, wherein the polygonal mirror has a regular polygonal shape when viewed from the direction along the rotation axis.
  9.  前記ポリゴンミラーは、その回転軸に沿う方向から視た平面形状が正方形とされる請求項8記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 8, wherein the polygonal mirror has a square shape when viewed from a direction along a rotation axis thereof.
  10.  前記光源と前記回動反射体との間に介在し、前記光源からの光を集光して前記回動反射体に向けて出射させる集光部材を備える請求項1から請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 10. The light emitting device according to claim 1, further comprising a condensing member that is interposed between the light source and the rotating reflector and collects light from the light source and emits the light toward the rotating reflector. The lighting device according to item 1.
  11.  前記集光部材は、前記回動反射体に向けて出射させる光の進行方向が、前記光入射面に並行するよう、前記光源からの光を集光するものとされる請求項10記載の照明装置。 The said condensing member condenses the light from the said light source so that the advancing direction of the light radiate | emitted toward the said rotation reflector may be parallel to the said light-incidence surface. apparatus.
  12.  前記制御部は、前記光源を周期的に点滅させ、点灯期間と消灯期間との時間比率を変化させるようにしている請求項1から請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the control unit is configured to periodically blink the light source to change a time ratio between a lighting period and a non-lighting period.
  13.  前記導光部材は、前記光入射面における前記複数の領域毎に分割された複数の分割導光部材から構成される請求項1から請求項12のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the light guide member includes a plurality of divided light guide members divided for each of the plurality of regions on the light incident surface.
  14.  隣り合う前記分割導光部材の間には、前記分割導光部材よりも相対的に屈折率が低い低屈折率層が介在している請求項13記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 13, wherein a low refractive index layer having a refractive index relatively lower than that of the divided light guide member is interposed between the adjacent divided light guide members.
  15.  積層される複数の前記導光部材は、前記光入射面同士が互いに面一状をなすよう配されている請求項1から請求項14のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 1, wherein the plurality of light guide members to be stacked are arranged such that the light incident surfaces are flush with each other.
  16.  前記回動反射体は、前記光源からの光を反射するとともに前記光入射面に並行可能な反射面を有するのに対し、前記積層方向に沿って並ぶ複数の前記光源は、前記反射面に並行するよう直線的に並んで配されている請求項15記載の照明装置。 The rotating reflector has a reflecting surface that reflects light from the light source and can be parallel to the light incident surface, whereas the plurality of light sources arranged along the stacking direction are parallel to the reflecting surface. The lighting device according to claim 15, wherein the lighting device is arranged in a straight line so as to.
  17.  前記導光部材は、前記光出射面とは反対側に位置し且つ前記光出射面に並行する底面を有している請求項1から請求項16のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 16, wherein the light guide member has a bottom surface that is located on a side opposite to the light emitting surface and is parallel to the light emitting surface.
  18.  積層される複数の前記導光部材には、相対的に光出射側に配される第1導光部材と、相対的に前記第1導光部材に対して前記光出射側とは反対側に配される第2導光部材とが少なくとも含まれており、
     前記第2導光部材は、前記第1導光部材が有する前記底面を支持する支持面を有するとともに、この支持面に対して前記光入射面側から視た奥行き方向について隣り合う形で前記光出射面を有している請求項1から請求項17のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。
    The plurality of light guide members to be stacked are relatively arranged on a side opposite to the light output side with respect to the first light guide member, relative to the first light guide member disposed on the light output side And at least a second light guide member disposed,
    The second light guide member has a support surface that supports the bottom surface of the first light guide member, and the light is adjacent to the support surface in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side. The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 17, further comprising an emission surface.
  19.  前記第2導光部材には、前記光出射面を有するとともに前記支持面よりも前記光出射側に突出する突出出光部が設けられている請求項18記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 18, wherein the second light guide member is provided with a protruding light output portion that has the light output surface and protrudes further toward the light output side than the support surface.
  20.  前記第2導光部材における前記突出出光部は、有している前記光出射面が、前記第1導光部材が有する前記光出射面と面一状をなすよう形成されている請求項19記載の照明装置。 The projecting light exit portion of the second light guide member is formed so that the light exit surface thereof is flush with the light exit surface of the first light guide member. Lighting equipment.
  21.  前記第2導光部材が有する前記底面のうち、平面に視て前記突出出光部と重畳する部分には、前記光入射面側から視た奥行き方向に向けて前記光出射側に立ち上がるような勾配を持つ傾斜面が形成されている請求項19または請求項20記載の照明装置。 Of the bottom surface of the second light guide member, a portion that overlaps with the protruding light exiting portion when viewed in plan is a gradient that rises toward the light exiting side in the depth direction viewed from the light incident surface side. 21. The lighting device according to claim 19 or 20, wherein an inclined surface having the shape is formed.
  22.  積層される複数の前記導光部材は、隣り合う前記光出射面同士の面積がほぼ等しいものとされる請求項1から請求項21のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 21, wherein the plurality of light guide members to be stacked have substantially the same area between adjacent light emitting surfaces.
  23.  積層される複数の前記導光部材は、前記走査方向についての寸法が互いに等しいものとされる請求項1から請求項22のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 22, wherein the plurality of light guide members to be stacked have the same dimension in the scanning direction.
  24.  前記導光部材は、前記光出射面とは反対側に位置する底面を有しており、
     前記底面に沿って配されるとともに光を反射させる反射部材が備えられている請求項1から請求項23のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。
    The light guide member has a bottom surface located on the opposite side of the light emitting surface,
    The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 23, further comprising a reflecting member that is disposed along the bottom surface and reflects light.
  25.  前記反射部材は、前記導光部材における前記光入射面とは反対側の面を覆うものとされる請求項24記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 24, wherein the reflecting member covers a surface of the light guide member opposite to the light incident surface.
  26.  前記光源は、LEDとされる請求項1から請求項25のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 25, wherein the light source is an LED.
  27.  請求項1から請求項26のいずれか1項に記載の照明装置と、前記照明装置からの光を利用して表示を行う表示パネルとを備える表示装置。 A display device comprising: the lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 26; and a display panel that performs display using light from the lighting device.
  28.  前記表示パネルは、一対の基板間に液晶を封入してなる液晶パネルとされる請求項27記載の表示装置。 28. The display device according to claim 27, wherein the display panel is a liquid crystal panel in which liquid crystal is sealed between a pair of substrates.
  29.  請求項27または請求項28に記載された表示装置を備えるテレビ受信装置。 A television receiver comprising the display device according to claim 27 or claim 28.
PCT/JP2011/063707 2010-07-26 2011-06-15 Illumination apparatus, display apparatus, and television receiver apparatus WO2012014591A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010167209 2010-07-26
JP2010-167209 2010-07-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012014591A1 true WO2012014591A1 (en) 2012-02-02

Family

ID=45529812

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/063707 WO2012014591A1 (en) 2010-07-26 2011-06-15 Illumination apparatus, display apparatus, and television receiver apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2012014591A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109521599A (en) * 2017-09-18 2019-03-26 宏碁股份有限公司 Side light type back light module, display device and its method for controlling backlight thereof

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006190684A (en) * 2004-12-30 2006-07-20 Osram Opto Semiconductors Gmbh Lighting device having multiple semiconductor light source
JP2007024916A (en) * 2005-07-12 2007-02-01 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Laser scanning optical device
WO2009017066A1 (en) * 2007-07-27 2009-02-05 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Lighting device, display device, and light guide plate
JP2009048998A (en) * 2007-07-19 2009-03-05 Panasonic Corp Plane light-emitting device and image display device
JP2009170325A (en) * 2008-01-18 2009-07-30 Minebea Co Ltd Planar lighting system
JP2010122242A (en) * 2007-03-14 2010-06-03 Panasonic Corp Illumination device and image display apparatus using the same

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006190684A (en) * 2004-12-30 2006-07-20 Osram Opto Semiconductors Gmbh Lighting device having multiple semiconductor light source
JP2007024916A (en) * 2005-07-12 2007-02-01 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Laser scanning optical device
JP2010122242A (en) * 2007-03-14 2010-06-03 Panasonic Corp Illumination device and image display apparatus using the same
JP2009048998A (en) * 2007-07-19 2009-03-05 Panasonic Corp Plane light-emitting device and image display device
WO2009017066A1 (en) * 2007-07-27 2009-02-05 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Lighting device, display device, and light guide plate
JP2009170325A (en) * 2008-01-18 2009-07-30 Minebea Co Ltd Planar lighting system

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109521599A (en) * 2017-09-18 2019-03-26 宏碁股份有限公司 Side light type back light module, display device and its method for controlling backlight thereof
CN109521599B (en) * 2017-09-18 2021-10-22 宏碁股份有限公司 Side light type backlight module, display device and backlight control method thereof

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8430519B2 (en) Lighting device, display device and television receiver
KR101287636B1 (en) Backlight unit and liquid crystal display device having the same
US8582282B2 (en) Display apparatus
JP5154695B2 (en) Lighting device, display device, and television receiver
KR101094772B1 (en) Tiled display device
KR101833969B1 (en) Two-way liquid crystal display device
JP5138813B2 (en) Lighting device, display device, and television receiver
JP5337882B2 (en) Lighting device, display device, and television receiver
WO2011111444A1 (en) Lighting device, display apparatus, and television receiver
KR20110115739A (en) Back light unit and display apparatus
KR20110103729A (en) Display apparatus
CN102789091A (en) Display apparatus
WO2011077864A1 (en) Illumination device, display device, and television receiver
KR101681327B1 (en) Display apparatus
WO2012014591A1 (en) Illumination apparatus, display apparatus, and television receiver apparatus
WO2012011327A1 (en) Illuminating device, display device and television receiver
KR101992877B1 (en) Backlight unit and lcd including the same
WO2011074410A1 (en) Illuminating device, display device, and television receiver
KR101731641B1 (en) Display apparatus
WO2012008243A1 (en) Illumination device, display device and television receiver
JP6216054B2 (en) Display device for gaming machine
KR20130030443A (en) Backlight unit and liquid crystal display device including the same
KR101731642B1 (en) Display apparatus
KR101702127B1 (en) Display apparatus
TW200931129A (en) Edge-light type backlight module, liquid crystal display module and liquid crystal display apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11812184

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11812184

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP